Design Handbook For Braced or Non Sway S

EUROPEAN CONVENTION FOR CONSTRUCTIONAL STEELWORK
CECM CONVENTION EUROPEENNE DE LA CONSTRUCTION METALLIQUE
Recherches m
0
STEEL RESEARCH
Design Handbook
for Braced or Non-Sway
Steel Buildings
according to Eurocode 3
FIRST EDITION
1996 No85
All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system. or transmitted in any
form or by any means. electronic. mechanical. photocopying. recording or othemise. without the prior permission of
the Copyright owner: acting on behalf of JCSS :
ECCS General Secretariat

CECM Avenue des Ombrages, 32/36 bte 20
EKS B - 1200 BRUSSELS (Belgium)
Tel :3 2 - 2 i m OJ29
F ~ :s32-2R62 09 35
The Associations supporting JCSS assume no liability with respect to the use for any application of the material and
information contained in this publication.
ISBN : 92-9147-000-14
Authors :
CHANTRAIN Ph. ,Project Manager

SCHLEICH J.B. ,IngCnieur Principal
CONAN Y. and MAUER Th. ,IngCnieur-Techniciens
Service Recherches et Promotion technique Structures

ProfilARBED-Recherches
66, rue de Luxembourg
L - 4221 Esch / Alzette
Luxembourg
The present handbook has been translated from English to several European languages by the following
Civil engineering Experts :
Name I Company I Language

Ir. H.M.G.M. Steenbergen TNO-BOUW Dutch
Delft
Ing. Y. GalCa * C.T.I.C.M. French

Saint-RCmy-les-chevreuse
Prof. Dr.-Ing. J. Falke Universitiit-GH-Siegen German
Siegen
Ing. M. Bandini SIDERCAD S.p.A. Italian
Genova
Prof. Dr.-Ing. F. Millanes IDEAM / Univ. Pol. Madrid Spanish
Mat0 Madrid
* re-reader
3
EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
0 PRELIMINARIES 11
0.a Foreword 13
0.a. 1 Generalities 13
0.a.2 Objective of this design handbook 13
0.a.3 Warning 13
0.a.4 How to read this design handbook 14
0.a.5 Acknowledgements 14
0.b References 15
0.c Symbols and notations 16
O.C. 1 Symbols 16
o.c.2 Convention for member axes 16
O.c.3 Dimensions and axes of rolled steel sectans 16
O.c.4 Notations in flow-charts 17
0.d Definitions and units 19
0.d. 1 Definition of special terms 19
0.d.2 Units 19
I INTRODUCTION 21
1.a Basis of design 23
1.a. 1 Fundamental requirements 23
I.a.2 Definitions 23
I.a.2.1 Limit states 23
La.2.2 Actions 24
I.a.2.3 Material properties 24
I.a.3 Design requirements 25
I.a.3.1 General 25
La.3.2 Serviceability Limit States 25
I.a.3.3 Ultimate Limit States 25
1.b General flow-charts about elastic global analysis 30
1.b. 1 Flow-chart 1:Elastic global analysis of steel frames according to EC 3 30
1.b.l.l Flow-chart I: general 30
I.b.1.2 Flow-chart I: details 30
I.b.1.3 Comments on flow-chart I 31
1.c Content of the design handbook 36
I.c.1 Scope of the handbook 36
I.c.2 Definition of the braced frames and non-sway frames 37
I.c.3 Summary of the table of contents 39
I.c.4 Checks at Serviceability Limit States 39
I.c.5 Checks of members at Ultimate Limit States 40
Previous page
is blank
5
1 EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Table of contents
II STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE BUILDING 45

II.a Structural model 47
11.b Geometric dimensions 47
II.C Non structural elements 47
II.d Load bearing structure 47
I1.e Joints 48
I1.f Profiles 50
I1.g Floor structure 50
II.h Material properties 50
II.h. 1 Nominal values for hot rolled steel 50
II.h.2 Fracture toughness 51
II.h.3 Connecting devices 53
II.h.3.1 Bolts 53
II.h.3.2 Welding consumables 54
II.h.4 Design values of material coefficients 54
111 LOAD ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES 55
1II.a Generalities 57
1II.b Load arrangements 60
III.b. 1 Permanent loads (g and G) 60
III.b.2 Variable loads (9, Q, w and s) 60
IIl.b.2.1 Imposed loads on floors and roof (q and Q 60
III.b.2.2 Wind loads (We,i, Fw) 61
III.b.2.2.1 Wind pressure (wej) 62
III.b.2.2.2 Wind force (F,) 64
III.b.2.3 Snow loads (s) 64
III.c Load cases 65
II1.c. 1 Load cases for serviceability limit states 65
III.c.2 Load cases for ultimate limit states 66
Iv DESIGN OF BRACED OR NON-SWAYFRAME 67
1V.a Generalities 69
IV.a. 1 Analysis models for frames 69
IV.a.2 Flow-chart IV : Elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway steel
frames according to Eurocode 3 71
IV.a.2.1 Flow-chart IV general 71
IV.a.2.2 Flow-chart IV details 71
N.a.2.3 Comments on flow-chart IV 74
1V.b Staticequilibrium . 75
1V.c Load arrangements and load cases 76
1v.c. 1 Generalities 76
IV.c.2 Frame imperfections 76
1V.d Frame stability 77
1V.e First order elastic global analysis 78
IV.e.1 Methods of analysis 78
6
IV.e.2 Effects of deformations 78
IV.e.3 Elastic global analysis 79
1V.f Verifications at SLS 79
1V.f. 1 Deflections of frames 80
1V.g Verifications at ULS 80
1V.g.1 Classification of the frame 80
W.g.1.1 Hypothesis for braced frame 80
IV.g. 1.2 . Hypothesis for non-sway frame 80
IV.g.2 ULS checks 80
V CLASSIFICATION OF CROSS-SECTIONS 81
V.a Generalities 83
V.b Definition of the cross-sections classification 86
v.c Criteria of the cross-sections classification 88
V.C. 1 Classification of compression elements of cross-sections 88
v.c.2 Classification of cross-sections 88
v.c.3 Properties of class 4 effective cross-sections 89
V.d Procedures of cross-sections classification for different loadings 90
V.d. 1 Classification of cross-sections in compression 90
V.d.2 Classification of cross-section in bending 91
V.d.3 Classification of cross-sections in combined (N,M) 91
VI MEMBERS IN TENSION (Ntensjon) 103
V1.a Generalities 105
V1.b General verifications at ULS 108
VI.b.1 Resistance of gross cross-section to Ntemion 108
VI.b.2 Resistance of net cross-section to Ntemion 109
V1.c Particular verifications at ULS for angles connected by one leg 110
VI.c.1 Connection with a single row of bolts 110
VI.c.2 Connection by welding 112
VU MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION (Ncomprmjon) 113
VI1.a Generalities 115
VI1.b Classification of cross-sections 118
V1I.c General verifications at ULS 119
V1I.c. 1 Resistance of cross-section to Ncompression 119
VII.c.2 Stability of member to Ncompression 119
VII.c.2.1 Resistance to flexural buckling 119
VII.c.2.2 Resistance to torsionnal buckling and to flexural-torsional buckling 123
VI1.d Particular verifications at ULS for class 4 monosymetrical cross-section 124
VI1.d. 1 Resistance of cross-section to Ncompression 124
VII.d.2 Stability of member to Ncompression 124
VI1.e Particular verifications at ULS for angle connected by one leg 125
VI1.e. 1 Connection with a single row of bolts 125
7
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Table of contents 1
VI1.e. 1.1 Resistance of cross-section to Ncompression 125
VII.e. 1.2 Stability of member to Ncompression 125
VII.e.2 Connection by welding 125
VII.e.2.1 Resistance of cross-section to Ncompression 125
VII.e.2.2 Stability of member to Ncompression 125
vm MEMBERS IN BENDING (V ;M ;(V, M)) 127
V1II.a Generalities 129
Vm.b Verifications at SLS 134
VII1.b. 1 Deflections 134
VIII.b.2 Dynamic effects - vibrations 136
VIII.c Classification of cross-section 136
V1II.d Verifications at ULS to shear force VSd 137
VII1.d. 1 Resistance of cross-section to VSd 137
VIII.d.2 Stability of web to VZ.Sd 139
V1D.e Verifications at ULS to bending moment MSd 141
m . e . 1 Resistance of cross-section to MSd 141
VIII.e.2 Stability of member to My.Sd 142
VIII.f verifications at ULS to biaxial bending moment (My.sd, Mz.sd) 146
VIII.f. 1 Resistance of cross-section to (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) 146
VIII.f.2 Stability of member to (My.Sd, Mz.sd) 146
VII1.g Verifications at ULS to combined (Vsd, Msd) 146
Vm.g. 1 . Resistance of cross-section to (Vsd, Msd) 146
V1n.g. 1.1 Shear force VSd and uniaxid bending MSd 147
VIII.g.1.2 Shear force VSd and biaxial bending moment MSd 148
VIIl.g.2 Stability of web to (Vz.sd, My.sd) 148
M MEMBERS WIT" COMBINED AXIAL FORCE AND

BENDING MOMENT ((N, M) ;(N, V; M)) 151
IX.a Generalities 153
IX.b Verifications at SLS 159
IX.b.1 Deflections 159
IX.b.2 Vibrations 159
IX.c Classification of cross-section 159
IX.d Verifications at ULS to (N,M) 159
K d .1 Resistance of cross-section to (Nsd, MSd) 159
IX.d. 1.1 Uniaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-sections 159
K d . 1.2 Biaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-sections 162
IX.d. 1.3 Bending of class 3 cross-sections 162
IX.d. 1.4 Bending of class 4 cross-sections 163
IX.d.2 Stability of member to (NSd,MSd) 163
IX.d.2.1 Stability of member to (Ntension, My.sd) 163
IX.d.2.2 Stability of member to (Ncompression, MSd) 164
8
EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Table of contents
IX.e Verifications at ULS for (NSd ,VSd) 169

M.e.1 Resistance of cross-section to (NSd,VSd) 169
Ix.f Verifications at ULS to (NSd ,VSd,MSd) 170
Ix.f. 1 Resistance Of CrOSS-SectiOn to (NSd,VSd,MSd) 170
IX.f. 1.1 Uniaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-section 171
IX.f.1.2 Biaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-section 173
IX.f.l.3 , Bending of class 3 cross-section 173
IX.f. 1.4 . Bending of class 4 cross-section 174
Ix.f.2 Stability of web to (Nx.Sd, Vz.Sd, My.Sd) 175
X TRANSVERSE FORCES ON WEBS (F ;(F, N, V, M)) 177

X.a Generalities 179
X.b Classification of cross-section 180
X.c Resistance of webs to (F,N,V,M) 180
X.C. 1 Yield criterion to (F,N,V,M) 180
x.c.2 Crushing resistance to F 182
X.d Stability of webs to (F ; (F, M)) 183
X.d. 1 Crippling resistance to (F ; (F, M)) 183
X.d. 1.1 Crippling resistance to F 183
X.d. 1.2 Crippling resistance to (F,M) 183
X.d.2 Buckling resistance to F 184
X.e Stability of webs to compression flange buckling 185
XI CONNECTIONS 187
X1.a Generalities 189
X1.b Bolted connections 189
XI.b.1 Positioning of holes 189
XI. b.2 Distribution of forces between bolts 189
XI.b.3 Prying forces 191
XI.b.4 Categories of bolted connections 191
XI.b.5 Design ULS resistance of bolts 192
XI.b.5.1 Bearing resistance 192
XI.b.5.2 Shear resistance 194
XI.b.5.2.1 General case 194
XI.b.5.2.2 Long joints 194
XI.b.5.3 Tension resistance 195
XI.b.5.4 Punching shear resistance 195
XI.b.5.5 Shear and tension interaction 195
XI.b.6 ULS resistance of element with bolt holes 196
XI.b.6.1 Net section ULS resistance 196
XI.b.6.2 ULS resistance of angle with a single row of bolt 196
XI.b.6.3 Block shear ULS resistance 196
XI.b.7 High strength bolts in slip-resistant connections at SLS 196
XI.c Welded connections 197
XI.c.1 Type of weld 197
XI.c.2 Fillet weld 197
9
I -
EC 3 for non-sway buildings Table of contents 1
XI.c.3 Design resistance of fillet weld 198

XI.c.3.1 Throat thickness 198
I, XI.c.3.2 Design resistance 199
I XI.c.4 Design resistance of butt weld 199
XLc.5 Joints to unstiffened flanges 200
X1.d Pin connections 200
X1.e Beam-to-column connections 200
XIf Design of column bases 200
XII DESIGN OF BRACING SYSTEM 201
XII.a Generalities 203
XII.a.1 Flow-chart XI1:Elastic global analysis of bracing system according to EC 3 203
X1I.a. 1.1 Flow-chart XII: general 203
XI1.a. 1.2 Flow-chart XII: details 203
XI1.a. 1.3 Comments on flow-chart XI1 206
XII.b Static equilibrium 209
XII.c Load arrangements and load cases 209
Ml.c.1 Generalities 209
XII.c.2 Global imperfections of the bracing system 210
XII.d Bracing system stability 210
XII.e First order elastic global analysis 210
XIIf Verifications at SLS 210
XI1.g Verifications at ULS 210
XIIg1 Classification of the bracing system 210
XI1.g. 1.1 Non-sway bracing system 210
XII.g.2 ULS checks 210
APPENDIX A List of symbols 215

APPENDIX B List of tables 223
APPENDIX C List of flow-charts 226
APPENDIX D List of references to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 related to all check formulas at ULS 227
I 10
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Foreword I
0 PRELIMINARIES
11
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Foreword
0.a Foreword
O.a.1 Generalities
(1) The Eurocodes are being prepared to harmonize design procedures between countries
which are members of CEN (European Committee for Standardization).
(2) Eurocode 3 - Part 1.1 “Design of Steel Structures :General Rules and Rules for Buildings”
has been published initially as an ENV document (European pre-standard - a prospective
European Standard for provisional application).
(3) The national authorities of the members states have issued National Application
Documents (NAD) to make Eurocode 3 - Part 1.1 operative whilst it has ENV-status
(ENV 1993-1-1).
0.a.2 Objective of this design handbook
(1) The present publication is intended to be a design aid in supplement to the complete
document Eurocode 3 - Part 1.1 in order to facilitate the use of Eurocode 3 for the design
of such steel structures which are usual in common practice : braced or non-sway steel
structures.
(2) Therefore, the “Design handbook according to Eurocode 3 for braced or non-sway steel
buildings” presents the main design formulas and rules extracted from Eurocode 3 - Part
1.1, which are needed to deal with :
- elastic global analysis of buildings and similar structures in steel,
- checks of structural members and connections at limit states,
- in case of braced or non-sway structures,
- -
according to the european standard Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (ENV 1993-1-1).
0.a.3 Warning
(1) Although the present design handbook has been carefully established and intends to be
self-sufficient it does not substitute in any case for the complete document Eurocode 3 -
Part 1.1, which should be consulted in conjunction with the NAD, in case of doubt or need
for clarification.
(2) All references to Eurocode 3 - Part 1.1 are made in [...I.
(3) Any other text, tables or figures not quoted from Eurocode 3 are considered to satisfy the
rules specified in Eurocode 3 - Part 1.1.
Previous page
is blank 13
\Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Foreword 1
0.a.4 How to read this design handbook

(1) Example of numbering of chapters and paragraphs : VIII . a . 1. 2
(2) Layout of pages :
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension
t
left column short title
t
for references f the handbook
concerned chaDter
Main text with a following example about layout of chapters:

(-4
11 STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE BUILDING
(...I
11.h Material properties
(..J
II.h.3 Connecting devices
(...1
II.h.3.2 Welding consumables
(-4
(3) In the left column of each page (Ref.): references to Eurocode 3 are always included
between brackets [...I; the other references are specified without brackets; the word
"form." means "formula"
(4) References to Eurocode 3 are also given in the text between brackets [...I
0.a.5 Acknowledgements
(1) Particular thanks for fruitful collaboration are addressed to:

. 15 engineering offices : Adem (Belgium), Bureau Delta (Belgium), Varendonck
Groep/S teeltrak (Belgium), VM Associate Partner (Belgium), Ramball,
Hannemann & Hgijlund (Denmark), Bureau VCritas (France), Socotec (France),
Sofresid (France), CPU Ingenieurbiiro (Germany), IGB-Ingenieurgruppe Bauen
(Germany), Danieli Ingegnena (Italy), Schroeder & AssociCs (Luxemburg), D3BN
(the Netherlands), Ove Arup & Partners (United Kingdom), ECCS / TC 11
(Germany),
. RWTH : Steel Construction Department from Aachen University with Professor
SEDLACEK G. and GROTMANN D.,
. SIDERCAD (Italy) with MM. BANDINI M. and CATTANEO F.,
. CTICM (France) with MM. CHABROLIN B., GALEA Y. and BUREAU A.
(2) Grateful thanks are also expressed to :
. the ECSC which supported this work in the scope of the european research no
P2724(contract no 7210 - SA/513),
. the F6 executive committee which has followed and advised the working group of
the research,
. anyone who has contributed to the work: MM. CHANTRAIN Ph., CONAN Yves,
MAUER Thierry, GERARDY J.C.
[Ref. EC 3 for non-swaybuildings - References
0. b References
- in the left column of each page (Ref.): references to Eurocode 3 are always
included between brackets [...]; the other references are specified without brackets.
- references to Eurocode 3 are also given in the text between brackets [...I
Ref. 1, 1 Eurocode 1, ENV 1991-1, Basis of Design and Actions on Structures, Parts 1,
Basis of design
Ref. 1,2-1 Eurocode 1, ENV 1991-2-1, Basis of Design and Actions on Structures,
Parts 2-1, Densities, self-weight and imposed loads
Parts 2-3, Snow loads
Parts 2-4, Wind loads
Ref. 2 Eurocode 3, ENV 1993-1-1, Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules
and rules for Buildings (EC3)
Ref. 3 Eurocode 8, draft version, Design of structures for earthquake resistance (EC8)
Ref. 4 ECCS technical publication n"65, Essentials of Eurocode 3 Design Manual for
Steel Structures in Building, 1991, First Edition
Ref. 5 Practical exercises showing applications of design formulas of Eurocode 3 :
ECCS technical publication n071, Examples to Eurocode 3,1993, First Edition
Ref. 6 "Design handbook for sway buildings", from Sidercad (Italy)

Ref. 7 Software for the check of main formulas in Eurocode 3:"EC 3 tools" (available
for PC computer; Windows 3.1), from CTICM (France)
Ref. 8 Eurocode 3 Background Document 5.03 : "Evaluation of test results on
columns, beams and beam-columns with cross-sectional classes 1 - 3 in order to
obtain strength functions and suitable model factors", April 1989.
Ref. 9 Paper "Application de 1'Eurocode 3 : classement des sections transversales en I",

by Bureau A. and Galea Y., (CTICM), Construction metallique, no 1-1991.
15
-
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Symbols and notations 1
0.c Symbols and notations
0.c.l Symbols
[1.61 (1) See Appendix A for a list of symbols used in this design handbook. Those symbols are
conform to Eurocode 3.
O.c.2 Convention for member axes
[1.6.7] (1) For steel members, the conventions used for cross-section axes are:
. generally:
xx - along the member
YY - cross-section axis parallel to the flanges
ZZ - cross-section axis perpendicular to the flanges or parallel to the web
. for angle sections:
YY - axis parallel to the smaller leg
ZZ - axis perpendicular to the smaller leg
. where necessary:
uu - major axis (where this does not coincide with the yy axis)
vv - minor axis (where this does not coincide with the zz axis)
(2) The convention used for subscripts which indicate axes for moments is:
"Use the axis about which the moment acts."
(3) For example, for an I-section a moment acting in the plane of the web is denoted My
because it acts about the cross-section axis parallel to the flanges.
O.c.3 Dimensions and axes of rolled steel sections
(1) "bisyrnmetrical" (I and e, ) and "monosymmetrical" ( [ , T and L) rolled steel sections are
shown in table 0.1.
16
~
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Symbols and notations
O.c.4 Notations in flow-charts
(1) All the flow-charts appearing in the present design handbook should be read according to
the following rules :
- reading from the top to the bottom, in general
- the references to Eurocode 3 are given in [...I
- "nlf." means that the checks are not fulfilled and that stronger sections or joints
have to be selected.
- convention for flow-charts:
0
Q
f.c. x
Title
flow-chart number (x)
r - - -f. - - -
[Assumption 1
- - - T t - - -'
[Action: determination, calculation, ...
other flow-chart number (y)
the dotted line (-----) means that path

has to be followed through the box
17
-
(Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Symbols and notations I
Table 0.1 Dimensions and axes of rolled steel sections
I/ b I/
1 1 4
1 b L
4
I Z I
I I
I
h
Y -Y h
,1 j ‘ c ,l
Z
I
Z
;7
h
1
L b
Z
L
1
Ztf
Y
1”1
b
U ! . V I
h b
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Definitions and units I
0.d Definitions and units

O.d.1 Definition of special terms
[1.4.2 (111 (1) The following terms are used in Part 1.1 of Eurocode 3 with the following meanings:
. -
Frame: Portion of a structure, comprising an assembly of directly connected
structural elements, designed to act together to resist load. This term refers to both
rigid-jointed frames and triangulated frames. It covers both plane frames and three-
dimensional frames.
. Sub-frame: A frame which forms part of a larger frame, but is treated as an isolated
frame in a structural analysis.
. Tme of framing: Terms used to distinguish between frames which are either:
. Semi-continuous, in which the structural properties of the connections need
explicit consideration in the global analysis.
. Continuous, in which only the structural properties of the members need
explicit consideration in the global analysis.
. Simple, in which the joints are not required to resist moments.
. Global analysis: The determination of a consistent set of internal forces and
moments (N, V, M) in a structure, which are in equilibrium with a particular set of
actions on the structure.
. First order global analysis: Global analysis using the initial geometry of the
structure and neglecting the deformation of the structure which influences the
effects of actions (no P-A effects).
. Second order global analysis: Global analysis taking into account the deformation
of the structure which influences the effects of actions (P-A effects).
. Elastic global analysis: First-order or second-order global analysis based on the
assumption that the stress-strain behaviour of the material is linear, whatever the
stress level; this assumption may be maintained even where the resistance of a
cross-section is based on its plastic resistance (see chapter V about classification of
cross-sections).
. System length: Distance between two adjacent points at which a member is braced
against lateral displacement in a given plane, or between one such point and the end
of the member.
. Buckling length: System length of an otherwise similar member with pinned ends,
which has the same buckling resistance as a given member.
. Designer: Appropriately qualified and experienced person responsible for the
structural design.
0.d.2 Units
11.5 (211 (1) For calculations the following units are recommended in accordance with I S 0 '1000:
. Forces and loads kN, kN/m ,
. Unit mass kdm3
. Unit weight kN/rn3
. Stresses and strengths N/-2 (=MN/m2 or MPa)
. Moments (bending ....) kN.m
19
I
I
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction
I INTRODUCTION
/- - 7
Previous page
is blank
21
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction 1
1.a Basis of design

(1) The table 1.1 summarizes this chapter 1.a providing the practical principles of design
requirements. Details and explanations are given in the following sub-chapters I.a.1 to
I.a.3.
I.a.1 Fundamental requirements
P . 1 (111 (1) A structure shall be designed and constructed in such a way that:
. with acceptable probability, it will remain fit for the use for which it is required,
having due to regard to its intended live and its cost, and
. with appropriate degrees of reliability, it will sustain all actions and influences likely
to occur during execution (i.e. the construction period) and use (i.e. the service
period) and have adequate durability in relation to maintenance costs.
P . 1 (2)l (2) A structure shall also be designed in such a way that it will not be damaged by events like
explosions, impact or consequences of human errors, to an extent disproportionate to the
original cause.
[2.1(4)1 (3) The above requirements shall be met by the choice of suitable materials, by appropriate
design and detailing and by specifying control procedures for production, construction and
use as relevant for the particular project.
I.a.2 Definitions
I.a.2.1 Limit states
(1) Eurocode 3 is a limit state design code in which principles and rules are given for the
verification of
. Serviceability Limit States (SLS) and,
. Ultimate Limit States (ULS).
[2.2.1.1(l)] (2) The limit states are states beyond which the structure no longer satisfies the design
performance requirements.
(3) These limit states are referred to physical phenomena as for instance :
[2.2.1.1(6)] a) for SLS, problems which may limit the serviceability because of :
. deformations or deflections which adversely affect the appearance of effective use of
the structure (including the proper functioning of machines or services) or cause
damage to finishes or non-structural elements,
. vibration which causes discomfort to people, damage to the building or its contents,
or which limits its functional effectiveness.
[2.2.1.1(4)] b) for ULS, problems which may endanger the safety of people and thus be regarded as
ultimate limit because of
. loss of equilibrium of structure or any part of it, considered as a rigid body,
. failure by excessive deformation, rupture, or loss of stability of the structure or any
part of it, including supports and foundations.
Previous page
is blank
23
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction I
I.a.2.2 Actions
(1) Details about actions are provided in Eurocode 1
12.2.2.1(111 (2) An action (F)is:
. a force (load) applied to the structure (direct action), or
. an imposed deformation (indirect action); for example, temperatures effects or
differential settlement.
[2.2.2.1(2)] (3) Actions (F) are classified as:
. permanent actions (G), e.g. self-weight of structures, fittings, ancillaries and fixed
equipment.
. variable actions (Q), e.g. imposed loads (cj, wind loads (w) or snow loads (s)
. accidental actions (A), e.g. explosions or impact from vehicles.
[2.2.2.2 (l)] (4) Characteristic values Fk of actions are specified:
. in Eurocode 1 or other relevant loading codes, or
. by client, or the designer in consultation with the client, provided that the minimum
provisions specified in the relevant loading codes or by the competent authority are
observed.
l2.2.2.4 (111 (5) The design (factored) values Fd of an action (for instance Gd, Qd, wd, sd) is expressed in
general terms as :
[form. (2.1)]
where Fk is the characteristic (unfactored) value of action.

y~ is the partial safety factor for the action considered - taking into
account of, for example, the possibility of unfavourable deviations of
the actions, the possibility of inaccurate modelling of the actions,
uncertainties in the assessment of effects of actions and uncertainties in
the assessment of the limit state considered (the values of are given
in chapter III: YG (permanent actions), YQ (variable actions),...).
(6) The combinations of actions respectively for ULS and for SLS are given in chapter 111.
[2.2.2.5] (7) Design values of the effects of actions :
The effects of actions (E) are responses (for example, internal forces and moments (NSd,
VSd, MSd), stresses, strains, deflections, rotations) of the structure to the actions. Design
values of the effects of actions (Ed) are determined from the design values of the actions,
geometrical data (ad) and material properties when relevant:
[form. (2.2)] (Ed = E(F,,ad, ...)I
I.a.2.3 Material properties
(1) characteristic values of material properties :
[2.2.3.1(3)1 Material properties for steel structures are generally represented by nominal values used as
characteristic values (unfactored) (Xk).
[2.2.3.2 (211 (2) design values of material properties :
For steel structures, the design (factored) resistance Rd (for example, design resistance for
tension (NRd), buckling (NRd), shear (VRd) ,bending (MRd)) is generally determined
directly from the characteristic (unfactored) values of the material properties (Xk) and
geometrical data (ak) :
[form. (2.3)] IRd = R(Xk.ak,.*-)/ y W l
where y~ is the partial safety factor for the resistance(the different y~ factors are
explicitly introduced in the design formulas and their values are given
in table 1.2).
24
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction
I.a.3 Design requirements

I.a.3.1 General
[2.3.1 (l)] (1) It shall be verified that no relevant limit state is exceeded
[2.3.1 (2)] (2) All relevant design situations and load cases shall be considered.
[2.3.1 (311 (3) Possible deviations from the assumed directions or positions of actions shall be considered.
[2.3.1 (4)] (4)Calculations shall be performed using appropriate design models (supplemented, if
necessary, by tests) involving all relevant variables. The models shall be sufficiently
precise to predict the structural behaviour, commensurate with the standard of
workmanship likely to be achieved, and with the reliability of the information on which
the design is based.
I.a.3.2 Serviceability Limit States

[2.3.4 (l)] (1) It shall be verified that :
[form.(2.13)]
where Ed is the design effect of actions, determined on the basis of one of the
combinations defined below,
Cd is a nominal value or a function of certain properties of materials
related to the design effect of actions considered.
(2) Practical checks of SLS (see chapter I.c.4) in floors and frames for instance:
where 6Vd is the design vertical deflection of floors (recommended limits 6vmn =
L/250, ...)
6Hd is the design horizontal deflection of frames (recommended limits
b n a x = w300, ..-)
fd is the design natural frequency of floors (recommended limits f m i n = 3
Hz, ...)
I.a.3.3 Ultimate Limit States
[2.3.2.i (211 (1) When considering a limit state of rupture or excessive deformation of a section, member
or connection (fatigue excluded) it shall be verified that:
[form. (2.7)]
where Sd is the design value of an internal force or moment (or of a respective

vector of several internal forces or moments)
Rd is the corresponding design resistance,
associating all structural properties with the respective design values.
(2) Practical checks of ULS (see chapter I.c.5) in members for instance:
I
(NSd ,vSd, MSd) (NRd, vRd ,MRd)l
condition concerning separate internal forces or moments or, interaction between them
((V,M), (N, M), ...I
where (NSd, VSd, Msd) are design internal forces and moments applied to the
members,
(NRd, VRd, Mrd) are design resistance of the members.
25
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction
Table 1.1 Summary of design requirements

1) frame submitted to SLS and ULS combinations Of design actions Fd (Gd, Qd, Wd. Sd, ...):
[form. (2.1)]
where F k is the characteristic value of actions

YF is the partial safety factor for the considered action (see chapter
III)
2) after global analysis of the frame :
- design effects of actions (e.g. deflections, frequencies) (for SLS):
Ed (=(6d, fd) )
- design values of internal forces and moments (for ULS):
Sd (=(NSd, VSd, MSd)
3) verification conditions at limit states:

- for SLS checks (see chapter I.c.4):
[2.3.4 (l)] . in general : 1-
where Cd is the nominal value related to the design effect of considered
j l
actions (design capacity).
. for instance:
where 8Vd is the design vertical deflection of floors
6Hd is the design horizontal deflection of frames
fd is the design natural frequency of floors
8vmax,&a,fmin are recommended limits (for instance:L/250, h/300,3 Hz)
- for ULS checks (see chapter I.c.5):
[2.3.2.1(2)]
. in general:
where Rd is the design resistance (=(NRd, VRd, MRd)):
[form. (2.3)] IRd = Rk / Y M l
where Rk is the characteristic value of the used material

y~ is the partial safety factor for the resistance (se
table 1.2)
condition concerning separate internal forces or moments or,

interaction between them ((V,M), (N,M),..)
26
Table 1.2 Partial safety factor for the resistance
The design values of - the resistances of cross-sections

- the buckling resistance of members
- and, the resistances of connections
shall be determined with the following partial safety factors w:
- at Ultimate Limit States:
- resistance of class 1,2 or 3 cross-section*) :
(plasticity or yielding)
- resistance of class 4 cross-section*):

(local buckling)
- resistance of members to buckling

(global and local buckling)
- resistance of net section at bolt holes
- resistance of bolted connections
- resistance of welded connections
- at Serviceability Limit States:

- slip resistance of preloaded bolts
Note 1: The different y~ factors are explicitly introduced in the design formulas.
Note 2: The y~ factors are provided according to the official version of Eurocode 3.
Those "boxed" values are only indicative. The values of to be used in
practice are fixed by the national authorities in each country and published
in the relevant National Application Document (NAD).
* The classification of cross-sections is defined in chapter V.
27
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction 1
Flow-chart I : Elastic global analysis of steel frames according to Eurocode 3 (General)

-
Tow:
Actions
2
Predesign 3
SLS checks 4
Choice of the type of global analysis

8
for ULS
9
10
ULS global analysis of the frame

12
to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M)

13
14
ULS checks of members 16
submitted to internal forces and moments (N, V, M)

17
IS
19
ULS checks of local effects 20
ULS checks of connections 21
28
Flow-chart I : Elastic global analysis of steel frames according to Eurocode 3 (Details)
[ Determination of load arrangements (EC1 and EC 8) J
I
Frame with bracing system Frame without bracing system

1 I
5
/Braced frame\ no 6
8 b 5 0,2 8u
[5.2.5.3. (2)] of the frame 7
c I [5.2.4.3.] 1
frame I5.2.5.2.1 8
swayfi;me
\
VSd
VCI
10.1 ’) no 1
I no > 0,5 [A.fy / N S d ] 0 7 5 b

I I 9
v
I
\
-
[5.2.4.2. (4)]
VSd I 0,25
0,l < -
Vcr Jr 10
[5.2.6.2. (4)]
---------
I
IL I FIRST IORDERANALYSIS
t d
I I SECOND ORDERANALYSIS 11
,
r
Non-sway mode buckling
I
Sway mode buckling

I
I2
length approach length approach

[5.2.6.2(1) a)][5.2.6.2.(7)] : [5.2.6.2(1)b)][5.2.6.2.(S)] :
with sway moments with sway moments
amplified by factor amplified by factor 1,2 in necessary members 13
1/(1-vSd/vcr>r5.2.6.2. (3)] beams & connections [5.2.4.5.(3)] [5.2.4.5.(2)]
I \ -
no members
with eo,d
Yes ss 5
3
I4
1 3
h-sway mode k b (sway mode L b ) (Non-sway mode L b ) s IS
? ? , 5E 0
I Classification of cross-section [Chap. 5.31 I I 16

1 1 I
17
19
18
c _______-_____----------
Checks of resistance
c Checks of local effects (buckling

_______----------------
20
r Checks of connections [Chap. 6 and Annex Jl 21
29
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction
I.b General flow-charts about elastic global analysis
(1) Chapter 1.b. 1'presents flow-chart I about elastic global analysis of steel frames (in general)
according to Eurocode 3.
(2) Chapter IV.a.2 presents flow-chart IV about elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway
steel frames according to Eurocode 3.
(3) Chapter XII.a.1 presents flow-chart XI1 about elastic global analysis of bracing system
according to Eurocode 3.
I.b.1 Flow-chart I : Elastic global analysis of steel frames according to Eurocode 3

(1) The flow-chart I aims to provide a general presentation of elastic global analysis of steel
frames according to Eurocode 3.
(2) The present design handbook only deals with the path 0 of the flow-chart I elastic global
analysis of braced or non-sway frames (presented in Flow-chart IV in chapter IV). All the
details are given in chapters I1 to XI of the handbook.
(3) The elastic global analysis of sway frames is out of the scope of the present design
handbook; the assumptions of the elastic global analysis of sway frames are briefly
presented -just for information - in the paths @ to @ of flow-chart I.
(4) The flow-chart I refers to flow-chart XI1 about elastic global analysis of bracing system
according to Eurocode 3. The flow-chart XI1 and all the details about bracing system
design are given in chapter XII.
(5) The flow-chart I is divided in 3 parts:
I.b. 1.1 general part (1 page)

1.b. 1.2 details (1 page)
I.b.1.3 comments (6 pages)
Lb.l.1 Flow-chart I : general

see the previous page
I.b.1.2 Flow-chart I : details
see the second previous page
30
I.b.1.3 Comments on flow-chart I
* Generalities about Eurocode 3:

All checks of (ULS) Ultimate Limit States and all checks of (SLS) Serviceability
Limit States are necessary to be fulfilled.
According to the classification of cross-sections at ULS (row 14; chapter V of the
design handbook) Eurocode 3 allows to perform:
. plastic global analysis of a structure only composed of class 1 cross-sections when

required rotations are not calculated i5.3.3 (411 or,
. elastic global analysis of a structure composed of class 1 , 2 , 3 or 4 cross-sections
assuming for ULS checks, either a plastic resistance of cross-sections (class 1 and
2)
or, an elastic resistance of the cross-sections, without local buckling (class 3) or, with
local buckling (class 4 with effective cross-section).
[5.2.1.2 (1:
In order to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M) in a structure
Eurocode 3 allows the use of different types of elastic global analysis either:
a) first order analysis using the initial geometry of the structure or,
b) second order analysis taking into account the influence of the deformation of the
[5.2.1.2 (2) structure
First order analysis (row 11) may be used for the elastic global analysis in the
following cases (types of frames):
The first order elastic global analysis of the frame should

take into account
actions the vertical the horizontal the global the member
loads loads imperfections of imperfections
the frame
(row 7) (row 12)
1) braced frames (a)
2) non-swayframes
(path 0) x X x
3) sway frames (C)
(paths @ and 0) x x x
[5.2.5.3 (3)
[5.2.5.3 (5)
(b) only the part of horizontal loads which are applied to the frame but not assume
to be transmitted to the bracing system through the floors.
(c) use of design methods which make indirect allowance for second-order effects
31
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction 1
1 [5.2.1.2 (3) - Second order analysis (row 11) may be used in all cases (types of frames) :
I
I
I
actions the vertical the horizontal the global the member

loads loads imperfections of the imperfections
frame
(row 7) (row 12)
1) for sway frames
(path @I X X X
bath 0) X X X x (a)
2) for frames
in general
(path @)@) X X X X
[5.2.4.5 (3)
(b) the more complex possibility of second order global analysis of the frame
(path @) could be conservative because it allows the bypass of the "sway or
non-sway frame" classification and consequently :
- either the first order analysis might be sufficient,
- or, the introduction of member imperfections would not be necessary in all
members.
On the other hand, particular care shall be brought to the introduction of
member imperfections ( @,d) which would be imposed for the global analysis
in the realistic directions corresponding to the deformations of the members
for the failure mode of the frame; that failure mode of the frame is related
tothe combination of applied external loads; otherwise, with more favourable
direction of member imperfections, the second order global analysis might
overestimate the bearing capacity of the frame.
- in the flow-chart I from path 0to path @ (from left to right) the proposed
methods for global analysis become more and more sophisticated.
* row I :
EC I : Draft Eurocode 1 Basis of design and actions on structures
EC 3: ENV 1993- 1- 1 Eurocode 3 Design of steel structures, Part 1.1:
general rules and rules for buildings.
EC 8: Draft Eurocode 8 Design of structures for earthquake resistance
* rows 2,4:
[Chap. 51
[Chap. 41
32
* row 3:
This flow-chart concerns structures using pinned andor rigid joints.
In the case of semi-rigid joints whose behaviour is between pinned and rigid joints, the
designer shall take into account the moment-rotation characteristics of the joints (moment
resistance, rotational stiffness and rotation capacity) at each step of the design @redesign,
global analysis, SLS and ULS checks). The semi-rigid joints should be designed
according to chapter 6.9 and the Annex J of Eurocode 3.
[4.2.1(S)] .
.............................................................................................................
*row4*
For SLS checks, the deflections should be calculated making due allowance for anysecond
order effects, the rotational stiffness of any semi-rigid joints and the possible occurrence
of any plastic deformations.
p.2.5.3 (2.11 * row 6 .-
braced frame unbraced frame
6b
k k
The frame is braced if

where 6b horizontal displacement of the frame with the bracing system
6, horizontal displacement of the unbraced frame,
according to first order elastic global analysis of the frame either with hypothetic
horizontal loads or with each ULS load case.
Note : in the case of simple frames with all beam-column nodes nominally pinned, the
frame without bracing would be hypostatic, hence 6, is infinite and thus the
condition &, I 0 , 2 6, is always fulfilled.
[5.2.4.3] * row 7 : global imperfections of the frame

initial sway imperfections of the frame equivalent horizontal forces
4) F2 -
-1
+ + + ' I
could be applied Fi
in the form of -'I
v + + + I f
4) F1
33
IRef. EC 3 for non-swaybuildings - I Introduction
[5.2.5.2] *row8: classification of sway or non-sway frame:

A frame may be classified as nun-sway if according to first order elastic global analysis
of the frame for each ULS load case, one of the following criteria (see row 9) is satisfied:
either,
r53
s2&general :
I 0,l ,condition which is acr2 10
equivalent to
where V S ~design value of the total vertical load

V, elastic critical value of the total vertical load for failure in a sway mode
( = x2EI / L2 with L, buckling length for a column in a sway mode; Vcr
of a column does not correspond necessarily to Vcr of the frame
including that column)
a, coefficient of critical amplification or coefficient of remoteness of
critical state of the frame
or, b) in case of building structures with beams connecting each columns at each storey level:
[5.2.3.2(4)]
6.CV s.(v,+ v,) I 0,l

h.xH h.(H, + H,)
where H, V total horizontal and vertical reactions at the bottom of the storey.
6 relative horizontal displacement of top and bottom of the storey.
h height of the storey.
H, V, 6 are deduced from a first order analysis of the frame submitted to
both horizontal and vertical design loads and to the global
imperfections of the frame applied in the form of equivalent
horizontal forces (see comments on row 7).
Notes:
- A same frame could be classified as sway according to a load case (VSdl for
instance) and as non-sway according to another load case ( V s e for instance).
- For multi-storeys buildings the relevant condition is -
Sd = maximum
Vcr . ~~
condition which is equivalent to acr= minimum (ad,

where (2) or acfi are related to the storey i.
' 34
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction I
ml
[5.2.4.2(411 * row 9 : Members imperfections may be neglected except in sway frames in the cases of
members which are subject to axial compression and which have moment
resistin connections, if :
,condition which is equivalent to

NSd
or equivalent to
where % non-dimensional slenderness ratio calculated with a buckling length

equal to the system length
fy yield strength
A area of the cross-section
NSd design value of the compressive force
N, elastic critical axial force ( = x2EU L2, with L = system length)
E factor ( = L - with L = system length)
.............................................................................................................
p.2.6.2 (4)] * row 10 : According to the definition of Q r introduced in comment on row 8:
,condition which is equivalent to 4 1 acr< 10

.............................................................................................................
* row 11 :
The actions to be considered in first order elastic global analysis and in second order
elastic global analysis are listed in the "generalities about Ebrocode 3" (see the first
comments on flow-chart 1) in function of the type of frame.
~~ ~~~
* rows 12,13,14 :
-path 0:
Sway moments amplified by factor 1,2 in beams and beam-to-column
connections and not in the columns. The definition of "sway moments" is
provided in p.2.6.2 (5)].
[5.2.4.5] - paths @ and @ : the introduction of member imperfections eO,d should be considered
equivalent to the introduction of distributed loads along the members :
I L I
I
I
equivalent to
4
N I
7with
L I
q = 8. Nsd. eo,d / L2
Q Q = 4.Ns,. 0 eo,d / L
Note : the equivalence of eo,d and (4, Q) loading is proposed here for a practical point of
view but it is not included in Eurocode 3.
* row 13 : For the meaning of the ratio b,

refer to comment on row 8.
VCI
35
[Annex E] * row 15 : Lb ,buckling length of members for sway or non-sway mode
NSd .. -c - ...
* row 16 : The classification of cross-sections have to be determined before all the ULS
checks of members, cross-sections and webs (rows 17 to 20).
* rows 17,18,19,20,21 :
The sequence of the Ultimate Limit States checks is not imposed and it is up to the
designer to choose the order of the ULS checks which are anyhow all necessary to be
fulfilled. On the contrary, the sequence of steps to select the type of analysis is well fixed
and defined in rows 5 to 10.
.............................................................................................................
r5.5.1.3 (6)] * row 19 .- When the member imperfections eO,d are used in a second order analysis (paths
@ and @), the resistance of the cross-sections shall be verified as specified in
chapter [5.4] but using the partial safety factor in place of mo.
1.c Content of the design handbook

1.c.l Scope of the handbook
(1) Actions (load arrangements) on buildings to be taken into account in the design are
presented as described in Eurocode 1, Ref. 1.
(2) The load cases for SLS and for ULS to be considered in the design are defined as
prescribed in Eurocode 3 Part 1.1, Ref. 2.
(3) The elastic global analysis of steel structures in braced or non-sway buildings according
to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1, Ref. 2 is assumed to be carried out :
a) by elastic global analysis of the structure to determine:
. the vertical deflections of beams, the horizontal displacements of frames and
vibrations of floors and,
. the internal forces and moments (N, V, M) in the members and,
b) by check of requirements for the Serviceability Limit States and,
c) by check of requirements for the Ultimate Limit States :

c. 1) by check of the resistance of cross-sections and,
c.2) by check of the buckling resistance of members and,
c.3) by check of local effects (buckling and resistance of webs) and,
c.4) by check of joints and connections,
36
for all members characterised by a class of cross-sections at ULS :

. classes 1 and 2, which assume a full plastic distribution of stresses over the cross-
section at the level of yield strength or,
. class 3, which is based on an elastic distribution of stresses across the cross-
section with the yield strength reached at the extreme fibres or,
. class 4, which makes explicit allowances for the effects of local buckling
appearing in the cross-section.
(4) The elastic global analysis of steel bracing system according to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1, Ref.
2 is assumed to be carried out with the same hypothesis than for steel structures but with
specific actions ;loads and effects of global imperfections :
. from the bracing system itself and,
. fi-om all the frames which it braces.
(5) This design handbook deals with the analysis of braced or non-sway steel structures
subject to static loading. Eurocode 3 (Ref. 2) and Eurocode 8 (Ref. 3) should be consulted
for the following problems which are not considered here: fatigue, resistance to fire,
dynamic analysis or seismic analysis.
p.i.4(111 (6) No fatigue assessment is normally required for building structures except in the following
cases :
a) members supporting lifting appliances or rolling loads,
b) members subject to repeated stress cycles from vibrating machinery,
c) members subject to wind-induced oscillations,
d) members subject to crowd-induced oscillations.
For those fatigue problems the chapter 9 of Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2) should be
consulted.
I.c.2 Definition of the braced frames and non-sway frames
15.2.5.1 (i)] (1) All structures shall have sufficient stiffness to resist to the horizontal forces and to limit
lateral sway. This may be supplied by:
a) the sway stiffness of the bracing systems, which may be :
. triangulated frames
. rigid-jointed frames
. shear walls, cores and the like
b) the sway stiffness of the frames, which may be supplied by one or more of the
following :
. triangulation
. stiffness of the connections
. cantilever columns
[Annex J] Semi-rigid connections may be used, provided that they can be demonstrated to provide
sufficient reliable rotational stiffness (see [6.9.41)to satisfy the requirements for sway-mode
frame stability (see i5.2.61).
37
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction I
(2) Framing for resistance to the horizontal loads and to sway. Two examples are given in
table 1.3:
[5.2.5.3 (l)] a) typical example of a frame with "bracing system", which could be sufficiently stiff :
.for the frame to be classified as a "bracedframe"
. and, to assume that all in-plane horizontal loads are resisted by the bracing system.
[5.2.5.3 (2)] The criterion of classification as braced or unbraced frames is explained in chapter
N.g.1.1.
[5.2.5.2 (l)] b) example of an unbraced frame which could have sufficiently stiff moment-resisting
joints between the beams and the columns :
. for the frame to be classified as a "non-swayframe"
. and, to neglect any additional internal forces or moments arising from in-plane
horizontal displacements of the nodes of the frame.
[5.2.5.2 (3), (4)] The criteria of classification as sway or non-sway frames are detailed in chapter
N.g. 1.2.
[Annex HJ
Table 1.3 Definition of framing for horizontal loads
1) With bracing svstem :
1111111 1 i l l l l
+
FRAME WITH BRACING BRACEDFRAME + BRACINGSYSTEM
2) Non-swav frames :
11111111 1 1 111
I.c.3 Summary of the table of contents

chapter I : . Limit States (SLS, ULS), design requirements;
. flow-chart about elastic global analysis of steel frames according to EC
3.
. scope, definitions;
. tables of SLS and ULS checks;
chapter I1 : complete set of data of the structure
chapter 111 : determination of load arrangements and load cases for
. Ultimate Limit States and,
. Serviceability Limit States
chapter IV : . frame design and,
. SLS checks for frames (see chapter I.c.4).
. ULS classifications of frames . braced frame condition and,
. non-sway frame condition
chapter V : classification of cross-sections at Ultimate Limit States
chapter VI to IX :
. SLS checks for beams (see chapter I.c.4).
. ULS checks of members (beams and columns, ...) submitted to internal
forces and moments (N, V, M) considering the resistance of cross-
sections, the overall buckling of members (buckling, lateral-torsional
buckling) and local effects (shear buckling of webs (V)): see chapter
I.c.5.
chapter X : . ULS checks of local effects: resistance of webs to transverse forces F
(yield criterion, crushing, crippling, local buckling, flange induced
buckling): see chapter I.c.5
chapter XI : ULS and SLS checks of connections.
chapter XII: design of steel bracing system
I.c.4 Checks at Serviceability Limit States
(1) The table 1.4 presents the different checks which shall be fulfilled by beams andframes at
Serviceability Limit States with references to the design handbook:
1 Table 1.4 Checks at Serviceability Limit States

Horizontal Vibration of floors
deflections of
Beams I Chapter VIII.b.1 I - Chapter VIII.b.2

Frames I ChapterVIII.b.1 I Chapter 1V.f. 1 Chapter VIII.b.2
39
(Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction
I.c.5 Checks of members at Ultimate Limit States

(1) The following tables define the different checks which shall be fulfilled at Ultimate Limit
States:
- by all the members of frames submitted to internal forces and moments (N,V,M),
- by all webs of cross-sections submitted to transverse forces F.
Table 1.5 Member submitted to internal forces, moments and transverse forces
-.-torsion
Ntension
-
Note: *) the effects of torsion are not considered in the handbook because the
Annex G of Eurocode 3 is not officially available yet.
. table 1.6 : Definition of the planes of cross-sections within internal forces, moments
(NSd, VSd, MSd) and transverses forces FSd are acting.
. table 1.7: For different types of loading on the members and on the webs (tension,
compression, bending, combined (N,M), transverse forces) the table 1.7
provides the internal forces, moments (N (Nknsion, Ncompression), V (V,,V3,
M(My,Mz)), transverse forces (F) and interactions between them
((V,M),(N,M),(N,V),(N,V,M), ...) to be checked at Ultimate Limit States.
. table 1.8: List of references to the design handbook related to all the check formulas at
Ultimate Limit States, for different types of loading.
The different types of loading on the members and on the webs
includesinternal forces, moments, transverse forces and interactions between
them (see also the more detailed table 1.7).
Two types of ULS checks are defined (resistance of cross-sections
andstability of members or webs) and refer to the following physical
phenomena:
. (R) resistance of cross-sections:
. tension
. compression
. shear
. bending
. resistance on webs to transverse forces
. crushing of webs to transverse forces
. (9stability of members or webs (global and local buckling):
.local buckling for class 4 cross-sections
. N buckling and N-M buckling of members
. lateral-torsional buckling of members
. shear buckling of webs
. stability of webs to transverse forces: crippling, buckling
. web buckling induced by compression flange
40
~ IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction I
The formulas of ULS checks include different parameters depending on the
class of the cross-section (see chapter V); they may consider the following
cross-section properties:
. plastic properties for class 1 or 2 cross-section (Wpc, ...)
. elastic properties for class 3 cross-section ( W e [ ,...)
. effective properties for class 4 cross-section (WeR , ...) taking into
account the occurrence of local buckling.
The table 1.8 is related to the classes of cross-section and shows if there are
differences between check formulas in function of those classes of cross-
section.
In Appendix D of the design handbook a similar table (table D.l) is provided
(for information) presenting a list of references to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref.
2) also related to all check formulas at Ultimate Limit States for different
types of loading.
(2) In respective following chapters tables present complete lists of the checks to be
performed at Ultimate Limit States for members or webs submitted to different loading:
. in chapter VI, table VI.l for members in tension,
. in chapter WI,table VII. 1 for members in compression,
. in chapter VIII, table VIII.1 for members in bending,
. in chapter IX, table IX.l for members with combined axial force and bending
moment.
Table 1.6 Planes within internal forces, moments (NSd, V S d , MSd)

and transverses forces FSd are acting
I
I I
I
-
FSd) lFSd z
I
I
1 v I Mz.Sd Mx.Sd
I I
I I
I Nx.Sd
I I
I
x--- I---
.-
I
I
I
Y .-**
I
I
I I
I Vz.Sd My.Sd
I.
t
I
NSd Vy.Sd VzSd MzSd FSd
{x~xz (x axis) XY xz xz XY xz
41
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction I
Table 1.7 Internal forces, moments and transverse forces to be checked at ULS for different
types of loading
rype of loading on the members Internal forces, moments and transverse forces
and on the webs and, interactions between them
z
Members in tension
[braces, ...) : chapter VI
z
Ntension
z
Members in compression I
:columns, ...) : chapter VII vi
Z
Ncornpression
Z
Members in bending
:beams,...) : chapter VIII
Members with combined (N, M)

:beams-columns,...) :chapter IX ii
Nx.Sd Nx.Sd
+. ' --t-
bansverse forces
In webs : chapter X
~ ]Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I Introduction
Table 1.8 List of references to chapters of the design handbook related to all checkformulas at ULS
moments and
(Ncomp.. Mz) S IX.d.2.2 (3), (4) IX.d.2.2 (3), (4) IX.d.2.2 (3), (4) N-M buckling
3. (N, My, Mz) R IX.d.l.2 (1) IX.d.l.3 (1) IX.d.1.4 (1) biaxial bending & axial force resistance
S IX.d.2.2 (l),(2) I IX.d.2.2 (l), (2) IX.d.2.2 (l), (2) (N-biaxial M) buckling +LTB
10. (N,V) R 1X.e.1 (1) K e . 1 (1) shear and axial load resistance
S VIII.d.2 (5) shear buckling
11. (N,v,M) R IX.f.l.1 (1) IX.f.l.3 (2) 1x.f.1.4 (2) uniaxial bending &
shear and axial force resistance
(NJz7My) s Ix.f.2 (3) (N-uniaxialM) resistance & shear bucklinj
12. (NJwyMz) R Ix.f.l.2 (1) IX.f.l.3 (1) 1X.f.1.4 (1) biaxial bending & shear and axial force
resistance
(NJz9MyMz) s IX.f.2 (3) (N-uniaxialM) resistance & shear bucklinj
13. F,(FN,(FNy), R X.C.1 (1) x.c.1 (1) X.c.1 (1) transverse force (+N, +My) resistance
(FBM,) ~
F R x.c.2 (1) crushing

S X.d.l.1 ((I), (2)) + X.d.2 ((1), (2), (3)) crippling + buckling
(FMY) S x.d.1.2 (1) crippling
S X.e(l) X.e (1) X.e (1) compression flange induced buckling
14. (F9Vz),@N7Vz), transverse forces + shear Vz (+N,+My)
x.c.l (1) X.C. 1 (1) x.c.1 (1)
(FYzMy). resistance
FXVz,My) s Ix.f.2 (3) (N-uniaxial M) resistance & shear bucklinl
p e of loading: 1. = tension members

2. = compression members
3. to 7. = members in bending
8. to 12. = members with combined N-M
13. to 14. = transverse forces on webs
ype of checks: R = resistance of cross-sections (L5.41)
S = stability of members ([5.51) or webs ([5.6],[5.7
43
i EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building I
I1 STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE BUILDING
- ._
{ - ,'
Previous page
is blank
45
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building 1
11 STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE BUILDING
(1) This chapter intends to list the data of the analysed building concerning the types of
structure, members and joints, the geometry and the material properties. The load
arrangements applied to the building are defined in chapter III.
1I.a Structural model
(1) The type of structure, the type of the bracing system and all the different prescriptions of
the project (office building, housing, sport or exhibition hall, parking areas,....) should be
defined.
1I.b Geometric dimensions
(1) The geometry of the building should be defined :

- the height, the width and the length of the structure, the number of storeys of the
building and the dimensions of the architectural element.
- definition of storeys: plane frame with 3 storeys:
1I.c Non structural elements
(1) All the elements of the building which do not bear any loads have to be considered in the
evaluation of the self-weight loads: walls, claddings, ceilings, coverings,...
1I.d Load bearing structure
(1) All the elements which bear the loads should be defined : frames, beams, columns, bracing
system, concrete core,... .
Previous page
is blank
47
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building
II.e Joints
(1) The design handbook assumes the use of pinned or rigid joints (see chapter XI).Semi-
rigid joints are not considered in the design handbook. In the case of semi-rigid joints
whose behaviour is between pinned and rigid joints, the designer shall take into account
the moment-rotation characteristics of the joints (moment resistance, rotational stiffness
and rotation capacity) at each step of the design @redesign, global analysis, SLS and ULS
checks). The semi-rigid joints should be designed according to chapter 6.9 and the Annex
J of Eurocode 3. Table 11.1 presents typical types of joints.
Table II.1 ' Typical types of joints
Rigid ioints
Semi-rigid joints
Pinned joints
48
~
I
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building
(2) The table II.2 presents the modelling of joints. The joints may be modelled by nodes offset
from the member centrelines to reflect the actual locations of the connections.
Table II.2 Modelling of, ints

Type of joint Modelling Behaviour
RIGID ioint
M
I
SEMI-RIGID ioint
PINNED ioint
49
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural conceut of the building 1
II.f Profiles
(1) The selected steel profiles used as beams and columns in the structure and as elements in
the bracing system should be listed and precisely referred.
II.g Floor structure
(1) Composition of the floor system (in situ concrete slab, precast concrete slab, steel sheet
deckings, slim floor, ...) is needed to determine the self-weight loads. Composite effect
between the floor and the beams is not considered in this design handbook.
II.h Material properties

[31
(1) The material properties given in this chapter are nominal values to be adopted as
characteristic (unfactored) values in design calculations.
II.h.1 Nominal values for hot rolled steel

t3.2.2.11
(1) The nominal values of the yield strength fy and the ultimate strength fu for hot rolled steel
are given in table 11.4 for steel grades S 235, S 275 and S 355 in accordance with EN
10025 and for steel grades S 275 and S355 in accordance with EN 10113.
(2) The european standard EN 10025 specifies the requirements for long and flat products of
hot rolled weldable non-alloy structural steels (steel grades: S 235, S 275, S 355).
The european standard EN 10113 specifies the requirements for long and flat products of
hot rolled weldable fine grain structural steels (steel grades: S 275, S 355, S 420, S 460).
(3) Similar values as defined in table 11.4 may be adopted for hot finished structural hollow
sections.
(4) For a larger range of thicknesses the values specified in EN 10025 and EN 10113 may be
used.
( 5 ) For high strength steels (S 420 and S 460) specific rules are given in the normative Annex
D of Eurocode 3. Their material properties are introduced in table 11.4.
(6) The table 11.3 compares the symbolic designations of steel grades according to various
standards. The design handbook always uses the single designation of structural steels
defined by the european standard EN 10027-1: "S"followed by the value of yield strength
expressed in N/mm2 (= MPa).
EN 10027-1 EN 10113 EN 10025 NF A 35-504/NF A 35-501 DIN 17102 DIN 17100 BS4360 ASTM
NF A 36-201
S 235 Fe 360 E 24 St 37-3 40 D
S275 FeE275 Fe430 E28 StE285 St44-3 43 D
S355 FeE 355 Fe510 E355 E36 StE355 St52-3 50D gr. 50
S420 FeE420 E 420 St E 420 gr. 60
S460 FeE460 E 460 St E 460 55c gr.65
50
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building 1
Nominal steel grade Thickness t (mm)*)

t140mm 40 mm < t I100 m**)
EN 10027-1 EN 10025 fy (N/mm2) fu (N/mm2) fy (N/mm2) fu (N/mm2>
Designation Standard
S 235 Fe 360 235 360 215 340
S 275 Fe 430 275 430 255 410
s 355 Fe 510 355 510 335 490
EN 10113
Standard
S 275 FeE 275 275 390 255 370
s 355 FeE 355 355 490 335 470
S 420 S 420 M 420 500 390 500
S 460 S 460 M 460 530 430 530
II.h.2 Fracture toughness

[3.2.2.3]
(1) The material shall have sufficient fracture toughness to avoid brittle fracture at the lowest
service temperature expected to occur within the intended life of the structure.
(2) In normal cases of welded or non-welded members in building structures subject to static
loading or fatigue loading (but not impact loading), no further check against brittle
fracture is necessary if the conditions given in tables 11.5 and II.6are satisfied.
Tables 11.5 and 11.6 provide the maximum thicknesses of the structural elements which are
allowable for certain lowest service temperatures and for different steel grades in
accordance to the EN 10025 and EN 10113 standards.
(3) For all other cases reference should be made to informative Annex C.
51
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building I
[table 3.21
Steel grade and quality Maximum thickness (mm)

I for lowest service tempt ature of
-1OOC -1 O C
Service condition 5 ) I s1 s2 s1 s2 SI 52
EN 10027 EN 100251) I
S 235 JR
S 235 JO
S 235 J2
Fe 360 B
Fe 360 C
Fe 360 D
' 150
250
250
41
110
250
108
250
250
30
75
212
74
187
250
22
53
150
S 275 JR Fe 430 B 90 26 63 19 45 14
S 275 JO Fe 430 C 250 63 150 45 123 33
S 275 J2 Fe 430 D 250 150 250 127 250 84
S 355 JR Fe 510 B 40 12 29 9 21 6
S 355 JO Fe 510 C 106 29 73 21 52 16
S 355 52 Fe 510 D 250 73 177 52 150 38
s 355 K2 Fe 510 DD 2) 250 128 250 85 250 59
EN 10113 3)
S 275 M Fe E 275 KG 4) 250 250 250 192 250 150
S 275 ML Fe E 275 KT 250 250 250 250 250 250
S 355 M Fe E 355 KG 4) 250 128 250 85 250 59
S 355 ML Fe E 355 KT 250 250 250 250 250 150
Service conditions 5): S 1 either: . non-welded, or
. in compression
S2 as welded, in tension
[n both cases of service conditions this table assumes loading rate R1 (normal static or slow
loading; no impact loading) and consequences of failure condition C2 (fracture critica
nembers or joints with potential complete structural collapse).5)
votes:
1) For rolled sections over 100 mm thick, the minimum Charpy V-notch energy specified in EN 10025 is
subject to agreement. For thicknesses up to 150 mm, a minimum value of 27 J at the relevant
specified tests temperature is required and 23 J for thicknesses over 150 mm up to 250 mm.
2) For steel grade Fe 510 DD to EN 10025, the specified minimum Charpy V-notch energy value is 40 J
at -20°C. The entries in this row assume an equivalent value of 27 J at -30°C.
3) For steels of delivery condition N to EN 10113-2 over 150 mm thick and for steels of delivery
condition TM to EN 10113-3 over 150 mm thick for long products and over 63 mm thick for flat
products, the minimum Charpy V-notch energy specified in EN 10113 is subject to agreement. For
thicknesses up to 150 mm, a minimum value of 27 J is required and 23 J for thicknesses over 150
mm up to 250 mm. The test temperature should be -30°C for KG quality steel and -50°C for KT
quality steel.
4) For steel of quality KG to EN 10113, the specified minimum values of Charpy V-notch energy go
down to 40 J at -20°C. The entries in this row assume an equivalent value of 27 J at -30°C.
5) For full details, refer to informative Annex C of Eurocode 3.
52
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structuralconcerit of the building 1
~ ~ ~ _ _ _ _ ~ ~ ~ ~~
[table D.21
Table II.6 Maximum thickness for statically loaded structural elements
~
Steel grade and quality Maximum thickness (mm)

for lowest service temuerature of
I 0°C I -10°C I -20°C
s1 s2 I s1 I
s2
EN 10027 EN 10113 1)
S 420 M S 420 KG 2) 250 50 140 36
S 420 ML S 420 KT 3) 250 145 250 94
S 460 M S 460 KG 2, 179 150 38 99 28
S 460 ML S 460 KT 3) 250 101 250 69
Service conditions 4): S1 either: .non-welded, or
. in compression
S2 as welded, in tension
In both cases of service conditions this table assumes loading rate R1 (normal static or slow
loading; no impact loading) and consequences of failure condition C2 (fracture critical
members or joints with potential complete structural collapse).4)
!!hU
1) For steels of delivery condition N to EN 10113-2 over 100 mm thick for steel grade S 460 and over
150 mm thick for steel grade S 420, and for steels of delivery condition M to EN 10113-3over 150
mm thick for long products and over 63 mm thick for flat products, the minimum Charpy V-notch
energy specified in EN 10113 is subject to agreement. Up to 150 mm thick, a minimum value of 27 is
required and 23 J over 150 mm thick up to 250 mm. The test temperature should be -30°C for steel
qualities S 460 KG and S 420 KG and -50°C for steel qualities S 460 KT and S 420 KT.
2) For steel qualities S 460 KG and S 420 KG the specified minimum Charpy V-notch energy in
EN10113 only go down as far as 40 J at -20°C. The entries in this row assume an equivalent value of
27 J at -30°C.
3) For steel qualities S 460 KT and S 420 KT the specified minimum Charpy V-notch energy in EN
10113 is 27 J at -50°C.
4) For full details, refer to informative Annex C of Eurocode 3.
II.h.3 Connecting devices

P.31
II.h.3.1 Bolts
[3.3.2]
(1) The nominal values of the yield strength f y b and the ultimate strength fub ( to be adopted as
characteristic values in calculations) are given in table 11.7.
1 Table 11.7 Nominal values of yield strengthhb and ultimate tensile strengthf,b for bolts 1
Bolt grade 4.6 4.8 5.6 5.8 6.8 8.8 10.9
fyb (N/m2) 240 320 300 400 480 640 900
fub ( N / m 2 ) 400 400 500 500 600 800 1000
53
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I1 Structural concept of the building I
II.h.3.2 Welding consumables
[3.3.5 (2)] (1) The specified yield strength, ultimate tensile strength, elongation at failure and minimum
Charpy V-notch energy value of the filler metal, shall all be either equal to, or better than,
the corresponding values specified for the steel grade being welded.
II.h.4 Design values of material coefficients
[3.2.5] (1) The material coefficients to be adopted in calculations for the steels covered by Eurocode
3 shall be taken as follows :
Table 11.8 Material coefficient
. modulus of elasticity E= 210000

E
. shear modulus G= G= 80700
2(1+ v)
. coefficient of linear thermal expansion : a= 12.10-6 1PC

. density p= 7850 kdm3
. Poisson's ratio v= 0,3
54
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - In Load arrangements and load cases I
I11 LOAD ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES
55
I Ref., EC 3 for non-sway buildings - 111 Load arrangements and load cases 1
m LOAD ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES
1II.a Generalities
12.25(111 (1) A load arrangement identifies the position, magnitude and direction of a free action.
[2.2.5 (211 (2) A load case identifies compatible load arrangements, set of deformations and
imperfections considered for a particular verification.
(3) For the definitions of actions (load arrangements: F= G, Q, ...) and effects of actions (E, S)
and for the design requirements it should be referred to chapter 1.a (Basis of design).
(4) Flow-chart 111.1 presents the general procedure to study structures submitted to actions :
- all load cases are defined by relevant combinations of characteristic (unfactored)
values of load arrangements (Fk),
- for each load case the global anal sis of the structure determines the design values
for the effects of actions (Ed = &,&, f ,... ; s d = N, v, M,o,...) which shall be
checked at SLS (Cd limits) and at ULS @ resistances).
This general procedure is used in the flow-charts about elastic design of :
- steel frames (in general) (flow-chart I; see chapter I),
- braced or non-sway frames (flow-chart IV; see chapter IV),
- bracing system (flow-chart XII; see chapter XII),
according to Eurocode 3. Moreover references to those general flow-charts I, IV and XI1
are specified at the different steps of the general procedure presented in the flow-chart
111.1.
( 5 ) For braced or non-sway buildings it is explained in chapter I.b.1 (flow-chart I) and in
chapter IV.a.2 (flow-chart IV) that the elastic global analysis of the structure could be
based on first order theory. In that case of first order elastic global analysis the principle of
superposition is applicable because the effects of actions (E, S) are linear functions of the
applied actions (F = G, Q, ...) (no P-A effects and used material with an elastic linear
behaviour).
The principle of superposition allows to consider a particular procedure to study structures
submitted to actions. This procedure illustrated in flow-chart III.2 could be more practical
because it should simplify the decision of which load case gives the worst effect.
For each single characteristic (unfactored) value of load arrangement (Fk) the global
analysis of the structure determines characteristic (unfactored) values for the effects of
actions : Ek = (&,8h, f,..)k ;Sk = (N,v, M,CT ,...)k.
All load cases are defined by relevant combinations of the characteristic (unfactored)
valuesfor the effects of actions (Ek;Sk). All these load cases directly furnish the design
values for the effects of actions (Ed = 6,,6h, f ,... ; s d = N, V, M, o,...) which shall be
checked at SLS ( c d limits) and at ULS (&j resistances).
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - III Load arrangements and load cases 1
Flow-chart III. 1 :Load arrangements and load cases for general global analysis of the structure
m IWYL
- row 1 of flow-chart I
- row 2 of flowchart N
ULS combinations of load arrangements (Fk) Determine all SLS load cases with relevant
(with partial safety factors = YG, YQ, ...):
SLS combinations of load arrangements (Fk): 2
- TOW 2 of flowchart I and XII
- row 2 of flow-chaxt I and W -TOW 4 of flowchart IV
- row 4 of flow-chart N
\ J J
All ULS load cases All SLS load cases

( analysed ? analysed ? 3
braced or non-sway frame

- rows 5 to 8 of flow-chart I
- TOWS 8 to 14 Of flowchart IV
7 SLS checks 4
to the considered load case in order to

Global analysis of the structure submitted '
to the considered load case in order to
determine the design values for the ULS determine the design values for the SLS
I effects of actions: Sd = N,V, M,0, ...
11 to 13 Of flow-chartI
effects of actions: ~d = &, &, f, ... 6
-TOWS
- TOW 15 Of flowchart IV - row 4 of flow-chart I and W
6 Of flow-chart IV
- rows 9 to 11 of flow-chart m -TOW
Y I
I l7
Determine ULS resistances (Rd): Determine SLS limits (Cd):
- rows 14 to 21 of flowchart I - row 4 of flow-chart I and W
7 - TOWS 16 to 22 Of flowchart IV
-rows 12 to 19 of flowchart XII
- row 7 of flow-chart N
SLS checks:
I no I I
I I
no I
Select stronger section(s) or joint(s)
I0 Adopt the structure if both ULS and SLS checks are fulfilled 10
Note: . for the definition of F k (Gk, Qk), yF (YG,'yd.

Sd, Rd. Ed, Cd : see chapter 1.a (Basis of design).
.references are done to flow-chart I (Elastic design of steel frames according to Eurocode 3),
flow-chart IV (Elastic design of braced or non-sway steel frames according to Eurocode 3),
and flow-chart XI1 (Elastic design of bracing system according to Eurocode 3).
58
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I11 Load arrangements and load cases
Flow-chart 111.2 :Load arrangements and load cases for first order elastic global analysis of the structure
I Determine all load arrangements with characteristic (unfactored) values of actions F k (Gk,Qk, ...) 1
1 load arrangements
2 I 2
analysed?
3
Global analysis of the structure submitted to the considered single
load arrangement (Fk) in order to determine characteristic
(unfactored) values for the effects of actions :
- for ULS Checks: Sk = (N, V, M, 0, ...)k
- for SLS checks: Ek= (6h.&. f. ...)k
IL
t 3
4
I I
I SLSchecks I 4
1
5 i
Determine all ULS load cases with relevant
ULS combinations of effects of actions (Sk)
(with partial safety factors y~= YG,YQ,...) 1 Determine all SLS load cases with relevant
SLS combinations of effects of actions (Ek) 5
6 (Design values for the effects of 6

S d = N , V , M , G , ...
All ULS load cases c

7 7
analysed?
I
8 Classification of frame: 8
braced or non-sway frame
9 r i e r m i n e ULS resistances @a)) 9

t I
I0 I0
Cd?/
11 I1
12 [ Select stronger section(s) or joint(s)

B - 1 I2
Note: for the definition of Fk (Gk,Qk), yF (YG,YQ), Sd. Rd, Ed, cd :see chapter 1.a (Basis of design)
59
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - III Load arrangements and load cases 1
III.b Load arrangements
(1) The following load arrangements are characteristic (unfactored) values of actions (Fk) to
be applied to the structure. The characteristic values of load arrangements given hereafter
are issued from Eurocode 1 (/l/).
(2) The table III.l provides a list of
- all the load arrangements (Fk>to be taken into account in building design and,
- the references to the chapters of the handbook where details are given about those
load arrangements.
Table III.1 Load arrangements Fk for building design according to EC 1

Load arrangements (Fk) Reference to the handbook
1) Permanent loads: distributed, g III.b. 1
concentrated, G
2) Variable loads:
- Imposed loads on floors and roof distributed, q III.b.2.1
concentrated, Q III.b.2.1
- Wind loads: wind pressure, We,i III.b.2.2
wind force, Fw III.b.2.2
- Snow loads: distributed, s
I III.b.2.3
III.b.1 Permanent loads (g and G )

Ref. 1, 1
1.5.1 (4) (1) Action which is likely to act throughout a given design situation and for which the
variation in magnitude with time is negligible in relation to the mean value, or for which
the variation is always in the same direction until the action attains a certain limit value.
III.b.2 Variable loads (q, Q, w and s)
Ref. 1, 1
1.5.1 (4) (1) Action which is unlikely to act throughout a given design situation or for which the
variation in magnitude with time is not negligible in relation to the mean value nor
monotonic.
III.b.2.1 Imposed loads on floors and roof (q and Q)

Ref. 1.2-1
6.3.1.1 (1) Areas in residential, social, commercial and administration buildings are divided into five
categories according to their specific use (see Table III.2).
(2) The values of characteristic imposed loads on floors are given in Table 111.2 according to
the category of areas and the loaded areas. The values of imposed loads for roofs and other
types of areas (garage and vehicle traffic areas) are given in Ref. 1,2-1, section 6.
\
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - III Load arrangementsand load cases 1
Table 6.1 and Table 6.2
Table III.2 Categories of building areas, traffic areas in buildings and roofs and imposed loads
:atego& specific use Example
A Areas for domestic and Gerneral 2,o

residential activities. stairs 38
balconies 4 ,O
B Office areas 3,O
Areas where people may C1: Areas with tables, etc.
C congrete (with the exception of C2: Areas with fixed seats,
areas defined under category A,
B, D and E) C3: Areas without obstacles for
moving people,
C4: Areas with possible physical
activities
C5: Areas susceptible to overcrowding,
D1: Areas in general retail shops,
D Shopping areas
D2 ~~ ~~
Areas for storage use including 6-0 7.O

E Areas susceptible to librairies. The loads defined beside
accumulation of goods, shall be taken as minimum loads
including access areas unless more appropriate loads are
defined for the specific case.
III.b.2.2 Wind loads (We,j, Fw)

Ref. 1 , 2 4
6.1 (1) (1) The wind forces acting on a structure or a structural component may be determined in two
ways:
- as a summation of pressures acting on surfaces provided that the structure or the
structural component is not sensitive to dynamic response (cd < 1,2),
- or, by means of global forces.
Ref. 1 . 2 4
9.2 (1) (2) It is proposed in this handbook to present the simple procedure which may be used for
buildings less than 200 m tall provided that the value of cd is less than 1,2. For values of
dynamic factor Cd see the figure given hereafter. In all other cases the detailed method of
Eurocode 1, (Ref. 1,2-4, Annex B) may be used.
200
150
100
50
Heigth
20
Breadth
10
5 10 20 50 100
61
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - III Load arrangements and load cases I
III.b.2.2.1 Wind pressure (we$
Ref. 1 , 2 4
5.4 (1) (1) The net wind pressure across a wall or an element is the difference of the pressures on
each surface taking due account of their signs (Pressure is taken as positive, when directed
towards the surface and is negative when represents a suction) (see table III.3).
Fig. 5.1 Table III.3 Pressures on surfaces
0
Internal pressure -Er
I ~
Ref. 1.24
5.2 (2) The wind pressure acting on :
. the external surfaces of a structure, We, shall be obtained from :
form. (5.1) We = qref.Ce (2, Xcpe
5.3 . the internal surfaces of a structure, Wi, shall be obtained from :
form. (5.2) wi = qref.Ce (zi>.cpi
Ref. 1.24.7.1 where qref is the reference mean wind pressure determined from :
,P 2
Ref. 1,24, form. (7.1) qref - ZVref
where p is the air density (generally = 1,25 kg/m3) ,

Vref is the reference wind velocity taken as follows
Ref. 1.24, form. (7.2) vref = CDIR.CTEM-CALT*Vref,O

wherebasic value of the reference wind velocity at sea level given
Vref.0
by the wind maps of the countries (Annex 6.A of Ref. l),
C D direction
~ factor to be taken as 1,0 unless otherwise
specified in the wind maps,
CTEM temporary (seasonal) factor to be taken as 1,0 unless
otherwise specified in the wind maps,
CALT altitude factor to be taken as 1,0 unless otherwise specified
in the wind maps.
Ref. ~ 2 - 4 8.5
, where Ce(Ze) is the exposure coefficient for z = Ze is defined by
Ref. 1,24, form. (8.6) ce(ze) = c:(z).cf(z) +7Kr.c,(z).c,(z)
where Kr, Cr (z), ct (2)are given for more details in [ECl,24, section 81
For flat terrain (i.e. upwind slope 5 5% in the wind direction) ,ct
=1,0. For such conditions the exposure coefficient ce is given in
the table III.4.
where cpe is the external pressure coefficient which depend on the size of the
effected area A and the shape of the building (see table III.6).
where Ze is the reference height appropriate to the relevant pressure coefficient (see
table III.5).
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I11 Load arrangements and load cases I
Ref. 1.24, 10.2.2 (1) c) Buildings whose height h is greater than 2b shall be considered to be in
multiple parts, comprising: a lower part extending upwards from the
ground by a height equal to b for which Ze = b; and a middle region,
between the upper and lower parts, divided into as many horizontal strips
as desired and for which ze is the height of the top of each strip.
10.2.9 and where cpi is the internal pressure coefficient. For a homogeneous distribution of
openings the value $i = - 0,25 shall be used.
I'able III.4 Exposure coefficient ce as a function of height z above ground

Ref. 1 . 2 4 rerrain Category:
Table 8.1
I Rough open sea, lake shores with at least 5 km fetch upwind and smooth flat
country without obstacles.
I1 Farmland with boundary hedges, occasional small farm structures, houses or trees.
I11 Suburban or industrial areas and permanent forests.
IV Urban areas in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and
their average height exceeds 15 m.
Ref. 1 . 2 4
Fig.8.1
0 1 2 3 4 5
Ref. 1 . 2 4 Table III.5 Reference height ze depending on h and b

Fig. 10.2.2
h > 2b
-b
63
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - III Load arrangements and load cases I
Table IlI.6 External pressure cpe for buildings depending on the side of the effected area
Ref. 1.24
Fig. 10.2.3
WindJ4
D
wind
+ -7-
f .
Wind
+
Ref. 1, 2 4 Zone
Table 10.2.1
Fig. 10.2.1 a A, A* B, B* C D E
Effected area [m2]
AI 1 m2 - 1,3 - l,o -0,5 + l,o - 0,3
A > 10 m2 - l,o - 0,8 -0,5 +0,8/+0,6 - 0,3
III.b.2.2.2 Wind force (F),

Ref. 1 , 2 4
6.1 (2) (1) The global force, Fw,shall be obtained form the following expression:
form. (6.1) Fw = qref.Ce(Ze).Cf.Aref.Cd
where Qef is the reference mean wind pressure (see III.b.2.2. l),
c,(z,) is the exposure coefficient for z = z, (see III.b.2.2.1),
z, is the reference height appropriate to the relevant pressure coefficient (see
III.b.2.2.1),
cf is the force coefficient derived from Ref. 1,2-3, Section 10, if available,
Aref is the reference area for cf ,
cd is the dynamic factor.
III.b.2.3 Snow loads (s)

Ref.l.2-3 (1) The snow loads are given by:
form. (5.1) s = pi.ce.ct.sk
where pi is the snow load shape coefficient,

sk is the characteristic value of the snow load on the ground (kN/mm2),
Ce is the exposure coefficient, which usually has the value l,O,
ct is the thermal coefficient, which usually has the value l,O.
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - I11 Load arrangements and load cases I ~
1II.C Load cases

(1) The following load cases are related to the general procedure to study structures submitted
to actions (see flow-chart 111.1 and comment (4) in chapter II1.a): all load cases are defined
by relevant combinations of characteristic (unfactored) values of load arrangements (Fk).
r2.3.2.2 (l)] For each load case, design values (Ed, Sd) for the effects of actions shall be determined
from global analysis of the structure submitted to the design values of actions (Fd = yF .
Fk) involved by combination rules as given:
- in table III.7, for SLS
- in table III.8 and table III.9, for ULS
(2) In the case of the particular procedure defined in flow-chart FC 3.2 (see also comment (5)
in chapter III.a), the characteristic (unfactored) values for the effects of actions (Ek, sk)are
obtained from global analysis of the structure submitted to each single characteristic
(unfactored) value of load arrangement (Fk).
For each load case, design values (Ed, Sd) for the effects of actions shall be determined
from combination rules defined in tables III.7 to III.9 where values of load arrangements
(Fk = Gk, Qk, g, q, s, w, P) are replaced by the characteristic values for the effects oj
W h n S (Ek = (&,8h, f,..)k ;s k = (N, v , M, B,...)k>.
For instance, in the case of the third example in table 111.9, the general load case 1.
(1,35.gk + 1,50 wk) should be replaced by the following particular load case 1. considering
the elements or the cross-sections with
. their worst effects of actions (for columns: axial force (N)k; for beams: shear force
(V)k and bending moment (M)d and,
. their worst combined effects of actions (for beam-columns: (N)k + (M)k ; ...) :
- max N = 1,35 (N)k(dUe to gk) + l,%.(N)k.mm(dUe to Wk),
- max V = 1,35 (V)k(due to gk) + 1,50.(V)k.max(dueto Wk),
- max M = 1,35 (M)k(due to gk) + l,SO.(M)k.ma(due to wk),
- max N + associated M,
- max M + associated N, ...
(3) In the following chapters 1II.c.l and III.c.2, the proposed combinations of actions are
simplifications adapted to building structures (for SLS, [2.3.4 (5)] and for ULS, [2.3.3.1 (5)l).
(4)If the limitations imposed at SLS and at ULS are difficult to be respected, more favourable
combinations of actions could be used instead of the respective simplified proposals of
table III.7 (then see [2.3.4 (211of EC 3) or tables III.8 and III.9 (then see [2.3.2.2(2)] of EC3).
III.c.1 Load cases for serviceability limit states
Ref. 4 Combinations of actions for serviceability limit states

Table IlI.7
table 2.3
I
Load combinations to be considered: Gk- permanent actions, e.g. self
with only the most unfavourable variable weight
actions (Qk.ma):
Qk- variable actions, e.g. imposed
loads on floors, snow loads, wind
with all unfavourable variable actions (Qk): I loads
2. Z G k +0,9xQk Qk.max-the variable action which causes
the largest effect
decisive 1I
65
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - III Load arrangements and load cases I
III.c.2 Load cases for ultimate limit states

Ref. 4
Table DI.8 Combinations of actions for ultimate limit state
table 2.1
h a d combinations to be considered: Gk- permanent actions, e.g. self

weight
with only the most unfavourable variable
actions (Gem=): Qk- variable actions, e.g. imposed
loads on floors, snow load, wind
YL- k +Y;L". Qk.max loads
1. 1,35*.xG, +1,50**.Qk.max &.mm -the variable action which causes
with all unfavourable variable actions (Qk): the largest effect
Y L - ~ G I+0,9Y;-xQk
, YG - partial safety factor for
permanent actions
2. 1,35*.xGk +1,35**.xQk
'YQ - partial safety factor for variable
actions
* If the dead load G counteracts the variable
action Q(meaning a favourable effect of G):
YG = 1,oo
f-f windload0
1-1 dead load
*If the variable load Q counteracts the dominant

loading (meaning a favourable effect of Q):
Yo = 0
The load combination Ghich gives the largest efl ct (i.e.internal forces or moment ) is decisive
Ref. 4
table 2.2 All actions (g, q, P,-s, w) are onsidered to 01 :inate from different sources
E E a I E a s load cases combinations of actions
E E E a I a s 1. 1,35.g + 1,50.q
C a I E E a g 2. 1,35.g + 1,50.s
3. 1,35.(g + q + s)
1. 1,35.g + 1,50.q
2. 1,35.g + 1,50.P*)
3. 1,35.g + 1,50.s
4. 1,35.(g + q + s + P"))
1. 1,35.g + 1,50.w
2. 1,35.g + 1,50.q
3. 1,35.g + 1,50.s
4. 1,35.(g + q + w + s)
g- dead load
9- imposed load
P- Point load *>assuming P is independent of g, q, s and w
S- snow load
W- wind load
66
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame 1
I IV DESIGN OF BRACED OR NON-SWAY FRAME
67
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame 1
IV DESIGN OF BRACED OR NON-SWAY FRAME

1V.a Generalities
[5.1.2 (I)] (1) Frames shall be checked :
. at Serviceability Limit States:
- for horizontal deflections (see chapter 1V.f. 1) ,
. at Ultimate Limit States:
- for static equilibrium (see chapter 1V.b) ,
- for frame stability (see chapter 1V.d) ,
- for resistance of cross-sections, members and connections (see chapter 1V.g) .
[5.1.2 (2)] (2) When checking the resistance of cross-sections and members of a frame, each member
may be treated as isolated from the frame, with forces and moments applied to each end as
determined from the frame analysis. The conditions of restraint at each end should be
determined by considering the member as part of the frame and should be consistent with
the type of analysis and mode failure.
IV.a.1 Analysis models for frames
(1) In general spacial frame structures may be separated into several plane frames that may be
considered as laterally supported at the spacial nodes (see table IV. 1, part 1.).
In the first step for the inplane loading of these plane frames out-of-plane deflections
between the lateral supports are neglected and only the inplane monoaxial action effects
are determined.
In the second step the individual members of the plane frame between the lateral supports,
i.e. the beams and the columns, are separated from the plane frame, to consider lateral
buckling and lateral-torsional buckling, under monoaxial bending and compression.
Members which are common to two different frames, e.g. columns, may be verified for
biaxial bending and compression (see table IV.l, part 2.).
(2) Table IV.2 shows the modelling of connections in the global analysis depending on their
rotational stiffness.
Ref. 4
table 5.2 Table IV.2 Modelling of connections
TvDe of connection Svmbols in the analvsis Designed for Design or detail criteria
Pinned connection tension, Small restraint to
compression sufficient rotations
or shear only rr----n
Rigid connection moment, shear, Small rotations,

tension or sufficient elastic moment
compression and shear strength
I--I=#
--
from an elastic
or plastic global
analysis
For semi-rigid connections see Eurocode 3, Part 1.1 (Ref. 2)

(3) Guidance on assumptions for reliable simplified modelling of buildings is provided in the
Annex H of Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2) which is in preparation: "Modelling of building
structures for static analysis". Previous page
is blank
69
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame
1 Table IV.l Modelling of frame for analysis

1. Separation of plane frames from the spacial frame :
I FRAME2 I
0 0
0
0
,0
2. Separation of individual members from plane frame:

IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Desim of braced or non-sway frame 1
IV.a.2 Flow-chart IV :Elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway steel frames

according to Eurocode 3 I
(1) The flow-chart IV aims to provide a general presentation of the subject dealt in the present
design handbook:
elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway steel frames according to Eurocode 3. All the
details are given in chapters I1 to XI of the handbook.
(2) The flow-chart IV refers to other flow-charts:
- flow-chart I about elastic global analysis of steel frames in general according to EC
3 (the flow-chart I is provided in chapter I).
- flow-chart XI1 about elastic global analysis of bracing system according to EC 3
(the flow-chart XI1 and all the details about bracing system design are given in
chapter XII) and,
(3) The flow-chart IV is a part of flow-chart I which gives a general presentation of
- elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway frames (= flow chart IV = path @ of
flow-chart I) and,
- elastic global analysis of sway frames which are out of the scope of the present
design handbook (= paths @ to @ of flow-chart IV).
(4) The flow-chart IV is divided in 3 parts:
IV.a.2.1 general part (1 page)
IV.a.2.2 detail (1 page)
IV.a.2.3 comments (4 pages)
IV.a.2.1 Flow-chart IV general

see the following page
IV.a.2.2 Flow-chart IV details

see the second following page
71
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway fi-ame 1
Flow-chart IV : Elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway steel frames according to EC 3 -
mw:
(General) 1
Actions 3
Predesign 5
SLS checks
1
and
9
Classification of the frame 10
for ULS 11
12
(braced or non-sway frame)
ULS global analysis of the frame 14
to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M) IS
17

19
72
1
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame I
Flow-chart IV : Elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway steel frames according to EC 3 w
( Assumptions of the frame modelling ) (Details) 1
7
[Determination of load arrangements (EC1 and EC 8 9 Z .
I ULS checks [Chap. 51 I I SLS checks [Chap. 41 I 3
f
t
Load cases 7 f
+
Load cases 7
‘ Firstanalysis
order elastic global]
of the f h n e
Frame with bracing

I \
=> &, 6h, f, ...
t
SLS checks
[Chap. 41
J
not fulfilled
I
r
First order elastic global analysis of the frame
1
Frame without bracing system
+ \
submitted to hypothetic horizontal loads: 6ZV ’

- of sway 1non-sway -
VSd
,hcH, VCr
[T)
1) with bracing system => 6 b
and 2) without bracing system => 6u * +
[Horizontal&) Vertical
vertical loads
I
1
f Global imwrfections of the frame 7

l=> equivaleit horizontal loads p.2.4.31 J
bracing system 6b 5 0.2 6u
[5.2.5.3. (2)] t 1
[ First order elastic global analysis of the frame
for each ULS load case
v 1
‘First order elastic global analysis of the frame ’ Non-sway frame l5.2.5.2.
for all concerned ULS load cases: 6CV 50.1 VSd
- or - 50,l
either, laterally supported if braced frame hcH VCr
or, without special lateral boundary
\
conditions if non-sway frame 1
--__________ -------______--__________
1
Classification of the cross-sections [Chap. 5.31

i
I
I L b, buckling length of members for non-sway mode [Annex El~~
1
t
r Checks of the in-plane s t a b i l i t y u )
not fulfilled
I
not fulfilled
( Checks of the out-of-plane stabili I
not fulfilled
+
__________
not fulfilled
I
__________
not fulfilled I
73
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame I
IV.a.2.3 Comments on flow-chart IV
* Generalities about Eurocode 3:

- All checks of (ULS) Ultimate Limit States and all checks of (SLS) Serviceability Limit
States are necessary to be fulfilled.
- According to the classification of cross-sections at ULS (row 16; chapter V of the design
handbook) Eurocode 3 allows to perform:
. plastic global analysis of a structure only composed of class 1 cross-sections when
required rotations are not calculated [5.3.3 (4)] or,
. elastic global analysis of a structure composed of class 1, 2, 3 or 4 cross-sections
assuming for ULS checks, either a plastic resistance of cross-sections (class 1 and 2)
or, an elastic resistance of the cross-sections, without local buckling (class 3) or, with
local buckling (class 4 with effective cross-section).
[5.2. 2 (1:
- In order to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M) in a structure Eurocode 3
allows the use of different types of elastic global analysis either:
a) jirst order global analysis using the initial geometry of the structure or,
b) second order global analysis taking into account the influence of the deformation of
the structure
[5.2.1.2(2: - First order global analysis may be used for the elastic global analysis in the cases of
braced or non-sway frames (row 15).
* rows 3,4: see chapter I.b.1.3 ; comments on row 2 , 4 of flow-chart I.
* row 5: see chapter I.b.1.3 ; comments on row 3 of flow-chart I.

.............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
* row 11: see chapter Lb.1.3 ; comments on row 6 of flow-chart I.
* row 12: see chapter Lb.1.3 ;comments on row 7 of flow-chart I.
* row 14 : see chapter I.b.1.3 ;comments on row 8 of flow-chart I.

* row 15 :
At this step of the ULS checks procedure the type of frame is defined as
- braced frame and the first order elastic global analysis of the frame should be
carried out for all ULS load cases,
- or, non-sway frame and the first order elastic global analysis of the frame might
have already . been done for all concerned ULS load cases when the criterion
scv has been chosen (rows 9 to 13).
hCH
IRef. -
EC 3 for non-sway buildings IV Design of braced or non-sway frame 1
The load cases should consider specific actions in case of braced or non-sway frames as
provided in the table below.
The global analysis of the frame determines the internal forces and moments (N,V,M) in
the members.
the vertical the horizontal the global

loads loads imperfections of the
frame
(row 12)
1) braced frames (a) X x (b)
2) non-swayframes (C) X X X
[5.2.5.3 (3)
15.2.5.3 (51
* row 16:
The classification of cross-sections have to be determined before all the ULS checks of
members, cross-sections and webs (rows 18 to 21).
.............................................................................................................
* rows 18,19,20,21,22: see chapter I.b.1.3 ; comments on row 18 to 22 of flow-chart I.
1V.b Static equilibrium
p.3.2.41 (1) For the verification of static equilibrium, destabilizing (unfavourable) actions shall be
represented by upper design values and stabilizing (favourable) actions by lower design
values.
(2) For stabilizing effects, only those actions which can reliably be assumed to be present in
the situation considered shall be included in the relevant combination.
(3) Variable actions should be applied where they increase the destabilizing effects but
omitted where they would increase the stabilizing effects (YQ = 0, in table lII.8).
(4)Account should be taken of the possibility that non-structural elements might be omitted
or removed.
(5) For building structures, the normal partial safety factor given in table III.8 of chapter 111
apply to permanent actions (YG = 1,0 if favourable actions).
(6) Where uncertainty of the value of a geometrical dimension significantly affects the
verification of static equilibrium, this dimension shall be represented in this verification by
the most unfavourable value that it is reasonably possible for it to reach.
75
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame 1
Iv.C Load arrangements and load cases
Iv.c.1 Generalities
(1) Load arrangements which may be applied to buildings are provided in chapter III.b.
(2) Load cases (see chapter 1II.c) may be established according to two procedures to study
structures submitted to actions:
- a general procedure presented in flow-chart III. 1 or,
- a particular procedure presented in flow-chart 111.2 which is applicable for braced
or non-sway buildings because such structure may be studied by first order elastic
global analysis.
(3) Two types of load cases shall be considered:
- load cases for Serviceability Limit States and,
- load cases for Ultimate Limit States.
where differences are related to combination rules:
- see table 111.7 for SLS combinations of actions,
- see table 111.8 for ULS combinations of actions.
Iv.c.2 Frame imperfections
[5.2.5.3 (411 (1) In case of braced frame global imperfections are not necessary for the design of the braced
frame itself but they shall be taken into account in the design of the bracing system (see
chapter XII).
(2) In case of nun-sway frame global imperfections are needed for the design of the frame.
p.2.4.1 (i)] (3) Appropriate allowances shall be incorporated to cover the effects of practical
imperfections, including residual stresses and geometrical imperfections such as lack of
vertically, lack of straightness due to welding or lack of fit and the unavoidable minor
eccentricities present in practical connections.
p.2.4.3 (111 (4) The effects of imperfections shall be allowed for in frame analysis by means of :
- an equivalent geometric imperfection in the form of an initial sway imperfection $ or,
- equivalent horizontal forces accordmg to table IV.3, either method is permissible.
(5) As shown in table IV.3 the initial sway imperfections of a frame are directly proportionate
to the relevant applied vertical loads of each load case. Therefore global imperfections of a
frame should be calculated for each load case.
76
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame I
rable IV.3 Global imperfections of the frame

Initial swav imDerfections uj of the frame equivalent horizontal forces
Ref. 4
table 5.5
F2
$ (Fi + F2) $ (Fi + F2)

2 2
[5.2.4.3(4)] (6) The initial sway imperfections $ apply in all horizontal directions but need only be
considered in one direction at a time. The table IV.4 gives the numerical values for $:
[form. (5.2)]
@ o = 1z ,
where
k c = , / 0 , 5 + - 1 I 1 , O and ,
"C
k , = , / q I i,o .
where II, is the number of columns per plane

"s is the number of storeys
p2.4.3 (2)] (7) Only those columns which carry a vertical load NSd of at least 50% of mean value of the
vertical load per column in the considered plane, shall be included in nc.
[5.2.4.3 (3)] (8) Only those columns which extend through all the storeys included in ns shall be included
in n, . Only those floor or roof levels which are connected to all the columns included in
Q shall be included when determining ns.
1V.d Frame stability

[ ~ ~(111i (1) i All frames shall have adequate resistance to failure in a sway mode. However, where the
frame is shown to be non-sway, no further sway mode verification is required.
[5.2.6.1(2)] (2) All frames including sway frames, shall also be checked for adequate resistance to failure
in non-sway modes.
p.2.6.i (311 (3) A check should be included for the possibility of local storey-height failure mode.
) ~ Frames with non-triangulated pitched roofs shall also be checked for snap-through
[ ~ ~ 6 . 1 ( 4(4)
buckling.
77
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame I
Table IV.4 Values for the initial sway imperfections @
\
Ref. 4
table 5.6 number of
columns nc=4 nC=5 nC=-
Irn
in plane
number
storeys
nn,= 1 1/200
1/ 240
1/220
1/260
1/230
1/275 I
1/240
1/285 1
1/280
1/335
n,= 3
H 1/ 275
1/ 300
1/ 300
1/ 325
1/315
1/345
1 / 325
1 / 355
1/385
1/420
1/445 1/490 1I 5 1 5 11535 1/630
W.e First order elastic global analysis

W.e.1 Methods of analysis
p.2.1. I]
(1) The internal forces and moments in a statically determinate structure shall be obtained
using statics.
(2) The internal forces and moments in a statically indeterminate structure may generally be
determined using either:
- elastic global analysis
- plastic global analysis
(3) Elastic global analysis may be used in all cases.
W.e.2 Effects of deformations
p.2.1.21
(1) The internal forces and moments may generally be determined using either:
- first order theory, using initial geometry of the structure.
- second order theory, taking into account the influence of the deformation of the
structure.
(2) First order theory may be used for the global analysis in the following cases:
- bracedframes,
- non-sway frames,
- design methods which make indirect allowances for second-order effects.
(3) Second order theory may be used for the global analysis in all cases.
78
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - IV Design of braced or non-sway frame
IV.e.3 Elastic global analysis

[5.2.1.3] (1) Elastic global analysis shall be based on the assumption that the stress-strain behaviour of
the material is linear, whatever the stress level.
(2) This assumption may be maintained for both first-order and second-order elastic analysis,
even where the resistance of a cross-section is based on its plastic resistance (see chapter
V about classification of cross-section).
(3) In order to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M) in braced or non-sway
frames, first order elastic global analysis may be used.
(4)Following a first order elastic global analysis, the calculated bending moments may be
modified by redistributing up to 15% of the peak calculated moment in any
member,provided that:
- the internal forces and moments in the frame remain in equilibrium with the applied
loads and,
- all the members in which the moments are reduced have class 1 or 2 cross-sections
(see chapter V).
(5) The load cases should consider specific actions in case of braced or non-sway frames as
provided in table IV.5 (issued from comments on row 15 in flow-chart FC 4).
~~
Table lV.5 Specific actions for braced or non-sway frames
actions the vertical the horizontal the global imperfections

loads loads of the frame
1) braced-frames(a) 1 X
2) non-swayframes (~11 X X X
t5.2.5.3 (3)
[5.2.5.3 (5)
(6) In case of first order elastic global analysis the principle of superposition is applicable
because the effects of actions (E, S) are linear functions of the applied actions (F = G, Q,
...) (no P-A effects and used material with an elastic linear behaviour). The principle of
superposition allows to consider a particular procedure to study structure submitted to
actions. This procedure illustrated in flow-chart FC 3.2 could be more practical because it
should simplify the decision of which load case gives the worst effect (see chapter III).
For each single characteristic (unfactored) value of load arrangement (Fk) the global
analysis of the structure determines characteristic (unfactored) values for the effects of
actions Ek = (6&, f,..)k ; s k = (N, v , M, 0,...)k.
All load cases are defined by relevant combinations of the characteristic (unfactored)
values for the effects of actions (Ek;sk). All these load cases directly furnish the design
values for the effects of actions (Ed = 6&, f ,... ; s d = N, V, M, (3,...) which shall be
checked at SLS (Cd limits) and at ULS (&resistances).
1V.f Verifications at SLS
(1) The limiting values for vertical deflections and vibrations of beams are given respectively
in chapters VIII.b.1 and VIII.b.2 (in chapter VIII about members in bending).
79
IRef. -
EC 3 for non-sway buildings IV Design of braced or non-sway frame I
Ref. 4
table 4.3 Table lV.6 Recommended limits for horizontal deflections
I Multi-storey frame Single storev frame
ho
- Portal frame without

gantry cranes 6 Ih / 150
- Other buildings 6 Ih / 300
lV*g Verifications at ULS
lV.g.1 Classification of the frame
lV.g.l.1 Hypothesis for braced frame
[5.2.5.3]
(1) Examples of bracing system are mentioned in chapter I.c.2 and in chapter XII.
[5.2.5.3(2)] (2) A steel frame may be classified as braced if the bracing system reduces its horizontal
displacements by at least 80 %.
(3) For practical presentation of the criterion used to classify a frame as braced reference may
be made to comments on row 11 of flow-chart IV (see chapter IV.a.2.3).
[5.2.5.3(3)] (4) A braced frame may be treated as fully supported laterally.
(5) As the criterion of braced or unbraced frame classification is related to the stiffness of the
frame and on hypothetic horizontal loads, the frame should be classified as braced or not
independently of load cases.
N.g.1.2 Hypothesis for non-sway frame
(1) Examples of non-sway frames are mentioned in chapter I.c.2.
[5.2.5.2] (2) In order to define the criterion used to classify a frame as sway or non-sway reference
may be made to comments on row 14 of flow-chart IV (see chapter IV.a.2.3).
(3) As the criterion of sway or non-sway frame classification depends on the total vertical
load, a same frame could be classified as sway according to a load case and as non-sway
according to another load case. Therefore the criterion of sway or non-sway frame
classification should be checkedfor each load case.
N.g.2 ULS checks
[5.1.2 (l)]
(1) The frames shall be checked at ultimate limit states for the resistances of cross-sections,
members and connections. For those ULS checks reference may be made to the following
chapters:
- Classification of cross-sections see chapter V
- Members in tension see chapter VI
- Members in compression see chapter VI1
- Members in bending: see chapter VIII
- Members with combined axial force and bending moments see chapter IX
- Transverse forces on webs see chapter X
- Connections see chapter XI
80
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classifcation of cross-sections 1
V CLASSIFICATION OF’ CROSS-SECTIONS
81
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections 1
V CLASSIFICATION OF CROSS-SECTIONS
V.a Generalities
(1) For a designer the usual procedure is to choose a cross-section in such a way that the
maximal capacity is not controlled by local buckling but is associated with the bearing
load of a particular member of the structure (column, beam, beam-column). Therefore the
local buckling plays an important role in the design of structural steel.
The critical level over which local buckling appears, is defined by the classification of
cross-sections.
(2) For the check of cross-sections and members at Ultimate Limit States, the steel cross-
sections shall be classified. The classification of cross-sections allows to evaluate
beforehand their behaviour, their ultimate resistance and their deformation capacity, taking
into account the possible limits on the resistance due to local buckling of compression
elements of cross-sections.
(3) The classification of cross-sections permits (see table V.1):
- to guide the selection of global analysis of the structure (elastic or plastic global
analysis),
- to determine the criteria to be used for ULS checks of cross-sections and members.
(4) Four classes of cross-section are defined according to (see chapters V.b and V.c):
- the slenderness of its compression elements (width-over-thickness ratios of web or
flange),
- the yield strength of the steel and,
- the applied loading.
(5) It is important to precise that the present classification of cross-sections is only based on
the distribution of normal stresses across the section due to the following separate or
combined axial forces andor bending moments applied to the cross-section:
z
I
I
Mz.Sd
Nx.Sd Nx.Sd
--- -x ,.. + +
I
(6) The present classification of cross-sections is not affected by shear forces (Vz.Sd,Vy.Sd).
The resistance of webs to shear buckling (induced by vz.Sd) should be checked in chapter
VIII.d.2.
(7) The flow-chart V.l presents the general procedure to classify I cross-section (see the
following page) . More details are given in chapters V.b and V.C.
(8) The flow-chart V.2 presents a procedure to calculate the effective cross-section properties
of class 4 cross-section where local buckling occurs (see the second following page). More
details are given in chapter V.c.3.
Previous page
is blank
83
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classificationof cross-sections 1
Flow-chart V.1 : Classification of I cross-section

Lews;
1 [ Determine &=m
] 1
2
web and flanges
Class of cross-section =
3
highest class of all elements
-1
Determine the slenderness of element to classify : d/tw, chf, ... 4
6
I Compression I I
I
Bending I I
I
Combined N + M
axial load and bending moment
I
I 6
I Ncomp. I I M I
Determine the position of neutral axis

7 with plastic distribution of stresses 7
+
8 q-> Class 1 or 2 element ? ass 1 or 2 elemen
(+)
““1
8 ,
9 r Determine the position of neutral axis

with elastic distribution of stresses 9
t 1
10
Class 3 element ? 10
(**I
-I
Class 4 element Class 4 element
11 I1
Note :
(*) see table V.3
(**) see table V.4
84
I Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classificationof cross-sections 1
Flow-chart V.2 : Calculation of effective cross-section properties of Class 4 cross-section
Approximate method assuming all elements of the cross-section at Ultimate Limit States:
the maximal compressive stress in each element is equal to yield strength (fy).
1 Type of loading on cross-section I
-
I
I
Combined N + M ' I Compression Bending I
I axial load and bending moment , rn
I
2
I Ncomp. I M I
7
c--
yes(
I
I
I
O#ly class 4 elemc .ts (web and/or fl*)
l
Calculate effective
section area Aeff.N
(from table V.8)
Bisymmetrical
cross-section?
have effe :ive properties
)
--------
/
- - - - -I
i
I
Calculate shift
of centroidal axis e M
(with Aeff.M from table V.8)
, 4
3
8 8
9 [ Calculate the lowest effective

section modulus Wen 1 9
10
bending moment 4 I0
11
Combined (N+M) 11
loading(M f O)?
' T / E f f e c t i v e properties:
12 - for N or (N, M) loading: Aeff.N ; eN. 12
- for M or (N, M) loading: Weff.y ;Weff.2

I
85
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections I
V.b Definition of the cross-sectionsclassification

[5.3.2]
(1) Four classes of cross-sections are defined, as follows:

. Class I cross-sections are those which can form a plastic hinge with the rotation
capacity required for plastic analysis.
. Class 2 cross-sections are those which can develop their plastic moment resistance,
but have limited rotation capacity.
. Class 3 cross-sections are those in which the calculated stress in the extreme
compression fibre of the steel member can reach its yield strength, but local
buckling is liable to prevent development of the plastic moment resistance.
. Class 4 cross-sections are those in which it is necessary to make explicit
allowances for the effects of local buckling when determining their moment
resistance or compression resistance.
1
(2) Table V.l recapitulates the characteristics of each class of cross-section in case of simply-
supported beam.
(3) The ultimate resistance of cross-sections and of members submitted to bending andor
compression, depends on class of cross-sections and is based on the following properties
(see table V. 1):
IDistribution of stresses
across the section
I Cross-section properties
for ULS check formulas safety*factors
p.3.4 (2)]
Class 1 or 2 - full plastic distribution plastic properties (Wpl) YMO
- at the level of yield strength
[5.3.4 (3)]
- elastic distribution
Class 3 - with yield strength reached elastic properties @Vel) YMO
in the extreme fibres
[5.3.5]
- elastic distribution across
the effective section taking
Class 4 into account local buckling YM1
- with yield strength reached
in the extreme fibres.
(4) When elastic global analysis is used, particular exemptions to these rules may be made for
the following specific cases:
[5.3.4 (4)] - when yielding first occurs on the tension side of the neutral axis,
[5.3.4 (5)] - when the cross-section is composed of class 2 compression flange and class 3 web.
Those exemptions are not considered in the handbook and reference may be made to
Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2).
86
1
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections 1
Table V.l Definition of the classification of cross-section
P1
-M Global
4 analysis
Available of
rotation structures
Class Behaviour model Design resistance capacity
of plastic
hinge
PLASTIC
across full section elastic
1 *f7; buckling important or,
dl fy
plastic
PLASTIC
AM across full section
2 limited elastic
dl fy
ELASTIC
across full section
3
8"
none elastic
ELASTIC
across effective section
4 none elastic
8"
87
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections I
v.c Criteria of the cross-sections classification
v.c.1 Classification of compression elements of cross-sections
[5.3.2(3)] (1) The lassification of a cross-section depends on the proportions of each of its cornpression
elements (width-over-thickness ratios of web or flange), on the yield strength of the
material and on the applied loading.
[5.3.2(4)] (2) Compression elements include every element of a cross-section which is either totally or
partially in compression, due to axial force andor bending moment, under the load
combination considered.
(3) In case of combined actions (NSd and MSd), the limiting proportions for classification of
elements are related to the position of plastic or elastic neutral axis (parameters 01 or w in
tables V.3 and V.4); that position depends on the stresses distribution across the section in
equilibrium with the applied design values of (NSd, MSd). Therefore the classification of
an element or a cross-section may be different according to the considered combination of
actions (N,M).
(4) In case of elements submitted to tension (Ntensioh local buckling is not expected and the
concerned elements shall be class 1.
v.c.2 Classification of cross-sections
[5.3.2(5)] (1) The various compression elements in a cross-section (such as a web or a flange) can, in
general, be in different classes.
[5.3.2(6)] (2) A cross-section is normally classified by quoting the highest (leastfavourable) class of its
compression elements.
[53.2(7)] (3) Alternatively the classification of a cross-section may be defined by quoting both the
flange classification and the web classification.
For instance, the compression flange of an I-section may be class 1 and its web may be
class 3. Then this I-section is class 3.
But this I-section may also be defined by quoting its class 1 compression flange and its
class 3 web.
(4) The determinant dimensions of cross-sections for classification are provided in table V . 2 .
(5) In case of I or H cross-sections, T-sections and channels ( [ ), the limiting proportions
for classification of elements (webs and flanges) are given :
- in table V.3, for class 1 and 2
- in table V.4, for class 3
(6) In case of rectangular and square hollow sections the limiting proportions for
classification of internal flanges are given in table V.6 for class 1, 2 and 3. For
classification of webs of these sections reference may be made to tables V.3 and V.4.
(7) In case of angles and tubular sections the limiting proportions for classification of
elements are given in table V.7 for class 1 , 2 and 3.
88
]Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections
v.c.3 Properties of class 4 effective cross-sections
, [5.3.2(8)1 ( 1 ) An element of a cross-section (as such a web or a flange) which fails to satisfy the limits
for class 3 should be taken as class 4. The limiting proportions for class 3 compression
elements should be obtained from tables V.4, V.6 or V.7.
[5.3.4(6)] (2) When any of the compression elements of a cross-section is class 4 the cross-section shall
be designed as a class 4 cross-section.
[5.3.2(2)] (3) Effective widths may be used in class 4 cross-sections to make the necessary allowances
for reductions in resistance due to the effects of local buckling.
[5.3.5] (4) The effective cross-section properties of class 4 cross-sections (&fE eN, Weff.+WeffJ
shall be based on the effective widths of the compression elements. The flow-chart V.2
presents an approximate method to determine the effective cross-section properties
assuming all elements of the cross-section at Ultimate Limit States : the maximal
compressive stress in each element is equal to yield strength, fy.
(5) The effective properties of class 4 cross-sections may be obtained from table V.8 or from
Eurocode 3 (Ref. 2) for other cases.
(6) In general the determination of the effective width of a class 4 element may be carried out
as follows (see [5.3.5(3)] of EC3) :
a) determination of buckling factor ka corresponding to the stress ratio yf (see [table
5.3.21 and [table 5.3.31 of EC3),
b) calculation of the plate slenderness xp ;given by :
in which t is the relevant thickness of the elements,

is the buckling factor corresponding to the stress ratio yf,
-
b is the appropriate width as follows :
-
b= d for webs,
-
-b= b for internal flange elements (except RHS),
-b= b - 3t for flanges of RHS,
b= c for outstand flanges,
-b=- b + h for equal-leg angles,
2
- b+h
b=hor- for unequal-leg angles.
2
c) calculation of reduction factor p with the following approximation ([formula (5.11)]
of EC3) :
I. when Xp50,673: p = l
II. when Xp >0,673 : p=
(Xp - 0,22)(
72
hP I
d) determination of the effective width beff.
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections 1
(7) For cases proposed in table V.8 the effective cross-sectional data may be determined as
follows :
a) calculation of Xpaccording to table V.8,
b) calculation of p according to the formula given in V.c.3(6) c),
c) determination of effective zones of class 4 elements according to table V.8.
(8) It is important to mention that only class 4 compression elements (web andor flange) shall
have effective width. For instance, HEA 500 cross-section in S 460 steel grade subject to
uniform compression, has a class 1 flange and a class 4 web; therefore the effective area
(A& issued from table V.8 is composed of full flanges and an effective web.
Ref. 4
5.335) (9) Where the stresses osd from effective cross-sectional data are less than fy, the plate
zpmay be decreased by
ml,
slenderness
which may cause an increase of the effective width.
[5.3.5(6)] (10) Generally the centroidal axis of the effective cross-section will shift by a dimension e
compared to the centroidal axis of the gross cross-section. This should be taken into
account when calculating the properties of the effective cross-section. Examples are given
in table V.10.
[5.3.5(7)] (11) When the cross-section is subject to an axial force, the method given in chapter IX.d.l.4
should be used to take account of the additional moment AM given by :
hM=NeN
where e N is the shift of the centroidal axis when the effective cross-section is subject
to uniform compression (single N),
N is positive for compression.
V.d Procedures of cross-sections classification for different loadings
[5.3.1(2)] (1) Because elastic global analysis is used for braced or non-sway frames (see chapter IV.e),
any class of cross-section may be used for the members, provided that the design of the
members takes into account the possible limits on the resistance of cross-section due to
local buckling (see table V.1).
(2) The class of a cross-section may specifically be determined according to the applied
loading :
- for cross-sections subject to compression, see chapter V.d. 1,
- for cross-sections subject to bending, see chapter V.d.2,
- for cross-sections subject to combined (N, M), see chapter V.d.3.
V.d.1 Classification of cross-sections in compression
(1) For cross-sections submitted to uniform compression (N,.Sd) two steps are required for
classification:
1) if using the plastic compression resistance of the cross-section, the limiting
proportions for class 3 sections shall be met for class 3 flange and web submitted to
single Ncompression: see tables V.4, V.6 or V.7; the cross-sectional area A shall be
used.
90
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections I
2) if an element of the cross-section fails to satisfy the limits for class 3 it should be
taken as class 4. The occurence of local buckling in that element should be
considered in calculating the effective cross-sectional area : Aeff (see table V.8). In
the case of class 4 monosymmetrical cross-section the shift of the relevant
centroidal axis (eN) should also be calculated.
V.d.2 Classification of cross-section in bending
(1) For crass-sections submitted to bending moments (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) three steps are required
for classification :
1) if using the plastic moment resistance of the cross-section, the limiting
proportionsfor class 2 sections shall be met for class 2 flange and web submitted to
bending moments (single My.Sd andor single Mz.sd) : see tables V.3, V.6 or V.7;
the plastic section modulus W,1 shall be used.
2) if using the elastic moment resistance of the cross-section, the limiting proportions
for class 3 sections shall be met for class 3 flange and web submitted to bending
moments (single My.Sd and/or single MZ& : see tables V.4, V.6 or V.7; the elastic
sdction modulus We1 shall be used.
3) if an element of the cross-section fails to satisfy the limits for class 3 sections it
should be taken as class 4.The occurence of local buckling in that element should
be considered in calculating the effective section modulus of the cross-section
when subject only to bending moment about the relevant axis (Weff.y from single
My.Sd; Weff.2from single Mz.Sd) (see table V.8).
V.d.3 Classification of cross-sections in combined (N,M)
(1) For cross-sections submitted to combined axial load (Nx.sd) and bending moments (My.Sd,
Mz.Sd) three steps are required for classification:
1) if using the plastic moment resistance of the cross-section, the limiting proportions
for class 2 sections shall be met for class 2 flange and web submitted to combined
axial load and bending moments ((Nmmpression or Ntention) and (My.Sd and/or Mz.Sd))
: see table V.3, V.6 or V.7; the cross-sectional area A and the plastic section
modulus Wpl shall be used.
2) if using the elastic moment resistance of the cross-section, the limiting proportions
for class 3 sections shall be met for class 3 flange and web submitted to combined
axial load and bending moments ((Nampression or Ntention) and (My.Sd and/or Mz.Sd))
: see table V.4, V.6 or V.7; the cross-sectional area A and the elastic section
modulus We1 shall be used.
3) if an element of the cross-section fails to satisfy the limits for class 3 sections it
should be taken as class 4.The occurence of local buckling in that element should
be considered in calculating the effective section properties (see table V.8) :
- Aeff : the effective area of the cross-section subject to uniform compression
(single Nx.sd);
- e N (= eNy, eN3: the shift of the relevant centroidal axis when the cross-
section is subject to uniform compression (single Nx.sd); in the case of class
4 monosymmetrical cross-section
- Weff (=Weff.y, Weff.z) : the effective section modulus of the cross-section
when subject only to bending moment about the relevant axis (single My.Sd,
single Mz.Sd).
91
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections
(2) Difficulties are met to determine immediately the class of an element submitted to
combined (N, M) loading because the classification depends on the design values of the
applied axial load NSd and the bending moment MSd which are obtained from global
analysis of the structure.
The limiting proportions for classification are related to the position of plastic or elastic
neutral axis (parameters a or w); that position depends on stresses distribution across the
section in equilibrium with those design values of (NSd, Msd). Therefore the classification
of an element or a cross-section may be different according to the considered combination
of actions (N, M).
Then assumptions of class should be tried and verified with the results issued from the
global analysis.
(3) The class of cross-section submitted to combined (Nsd, Msd) loading could simply be
determined in taking into account more severe loading which allows an easier evaluation
of the elements class. If the limiting proportions are met and correspond to a satisfying
class, complex calculations (positioning of neutral axis) should have been avoided. Two
examples illustrate this proposal :
- in case of web submitted to Nmmpression and My.Sd, it is easier to classify firstly the
web submitted to Ncompression,(seetables V.4, V.6 or V.7),
- in case of web submitted to Ntension and My.Sd, it is easier to classify firstly the web
submitted to single MYsd.(Seetables V.3, V.4, V.6 or V.7).
(4) In case of I or H-sections submitted to bending about major axis (My.sd) and axial load
(NX.sd),the classification of the web may be determined with table V.9 by comparison of
the applied design axial load (N,.sd) with the given limiting axial load (in compression or
in tension).
The table V.9 should be used (Ref. 9) :
- firstly by check of the limiting ratios between the applied axial load Nx.Sd and the
plastic load of the web (= A,.fy)? to determine if the web is class 1 or class 2 (in
this case the ultimate limit state is based on plastic distribution of stresses across
the section);
- and if limits for class 2 are not met, by check of the limiting ratios between the
applied axial load Nx.Sd and the plastic load of the full section (= A.fy), to
determine if the web is class 3 or class 4 (in this case ultimate limit state is based
on elastic distribution of stresses across the section).
92
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections
~ ~
rable V.2 Determinant dimensions of cross-sections for classification
--
Webs (internal elements perpendicular to axis of bending)(see tables V.3 and V.4) :
I tf
- .‘ q d L .
tw tw -=kH-
Rolled sections Welded sections
._-----_-----------------------------------------------
- Outstand flanges (see tables V.3, V.4 and V.5) :
- Internal flange elements (internal elements parallel to axis of bending)(see table V.6) :
I I I
Rolled sections Welded sections

...............................................................
- Circular tubes and angles (see table V.7) :
h
*) For a welded section the clear web depth d is measured :

.between welds for section classification
.between flanges for shear calculations (see chapter VIII)
**) For welded sections the outstand dimension c is measured from the toe of the weld.
93
Table V.3 Classification of cross-section : limiting width-to-thickness ratios for

class I & class 2 I cross-sections submitted to different types of loading
Types Stresses c .ss I (
of distribution for Web Flange Web
loading class 1 & class 2 -I
1+1fY 11s
Ncompression 33E 38s
m 10s
R 10s 11E
MY 72s 8 3 ~
~~
10s
I - I
f”
MZ
-ft$8--3”’ 11E
10E
1+1 fY
R 10~ 1 2 a > 0.: 1le
\Jcomp. - My
396s 456~
13a - 1 13a - 1 10E
1+1 fY 1 c a < O,! 1l&

Ntens. - My
36s
- 41,5&
a a 10E
R 10s 11E
Vcomp. - Mz 33s 38s
m fy
w1I gE
10s
RI 10sla llela
Ntens. - Mz
10E I a
Jalues of d, tw ,c, and tf I + : stresses in compression I R = rolled sections ;
re defined in table V.2 - : stresses in tension W = welded sections
fy (N/mm2> I I
235 275 355 I 420 1 460
s = p V q E(if t I40 mm) 1 0,92 0,81 0,75 0,71
E(ifm-<tl loo-) 1 0,96 0,84 0,78 0,74

class 3 I cross-sections submitted to different types of loading
Types Stresses cl, s 3 . -
of distribution for Web Flange

loading class 3
Ncompression 42&
14e
MY 124~
1 - I
14&
2 3 e m
1 + 1 f.. 02Ip-l: 1%
42e
0,67 + 0,33u/ 14e
1%
Ntens. - My
'Y
14&
1 - 1
qcomp. - Mz 42e
Ntens. - Mz
Jalues of d, tw , c, and tf + : stresses in compression

R = rolled sec1 ms;
r e defined in table V.2 - : stresses in tension W = welded se1 ions
is defined in table V.5
fy (N/mm2) 235 I 275 I 355 I 420 I 460
e=p37q E (if t I 4 0 mm) 1 I 0.92 I 0.81 I 0.75 I 0.71
e (if 40 mm < t I100 mm)
95
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections I
Table V.5 Buckling factor k, for outstand flanges

-= -
w ko Stress distribution ko Stress distribution
(compression positive) (compression positive)
-- -
-l,o 0,85 23,80
-0,9
-0,8
0,82
0,78
ri /Compression
20,05
16,64 \
-0,7 0,75 13,58
-0,6 0,72 10,86
-0,5 0,69 8,48 ----
-0,4 0,67 644
-0,3 0,64 4,74
-0,2 0,6 1 3,38
-0,l 0,59 2,37
-0,o 0,57 1,70
.r
+0,0 0,57 Compression 1,70 Compression
0 1
+o, 10,55 1,31

+0,2 0,53 1,07
493 0,5 1 0,90
474 0,50 0,78
+os 0,48 0,69
+0,6 0,47 0,6 1
497 0,46 0,56
+o,8 0,45 0,5 1
+o,9 0 9 4 4 0,47
+1,0 0,43 0,43
--
Note 1 :
Note 2 : The diagram shows a rolled section. For welded members the outstand
dimension c is measured from the toe of the weld (see table V.2).
96
rable V.6 Classification of cross-section : limiting width-to-thickness ratios for

internalflange elements submitted to different types of loading
-ype of loading Stresses distribution

classes 1 , 2 and 3
internal flange
Ncompression
I
class 1 I class 2
M 9
I
b / t f 3 3 3 ~0
ll
I
class 3
1
b/tf 3 3 8 ~
r -- internal flange
1
RI (b-3td / tf I 4 2 E
Values of b and tf are defined in table V.2
+ : stresses in compression R = rolled hollow sections

- : stresses in tension 0 = other sections
fy (N/m2) 235 275 355 420 460
&=pq E (if tf I 4 0 mm) 1 0,92 0,81 0,75 0,71
E (if 40 mm < t f I 100 mm) 1 0,96 0,84 0,78 0,74
97

angles and tubular sections submitted to different types of loading
Angles
Note :this table does not apply to angles in continuous contact with other components
~~
Type of loading Stresses distribution class 1 class 2 class 3
h/t I h/t I h/t 215~and
N compression
10 E 11 E b+h
I 11,5 E
2t
M and, see table V.3 (classes 1 and 2) and table V.4 (class 3) with limiting
width-to-thickness ratios concerning outstand flanpes.
Tubular sections
Type of loading class 1 class2 class 3
Ncornpression 9
d/t I
M and,
(N, M) 50~2 1 70~2 1 90~*
Values of h, b, t and d are defined in table V.2 I + : stresses in compression

fy (Nhm2) 235 275 355 420 460
e(iftI40mm) 1 0,92 0,81 0,75 0,71
E = 4235 I f y E (if 4 0 m < t 5 1OOmm) 1 0,96 0,84 0,78 0,74
~2 (if t 140 mm) 1 0,85 0,66 0,56 0,51
98
Table V.8 Effective cross-sectional data for symmetrical profiles (class 4 cross-sections)
Members in compression (N)
gross cross-section i - effective cross-section
- - A pi
m
bQ bQ
-
1+1 0 -.-b 1
1- N
b 1
0 -.-
t.&
t.& 18,6
56,8
I
I + I
l l -
b 1
t.& 56,8
- t I u +u u I I
Members in bending (My, M,)
- - I
-
b 1
0 t.& 138,8
0 -
b 1
t.& 18,6
1
-
b
-.- 1
t.& 21,4
- -.p .b
0 0
b 1
t.& 138,8
t
i
t.& 56,8
1 235 I 275 I 355 I 420 I 4 6 0
&=pvq I 4 0 mm)
E (if t 1 0,92 0,81 0,75 0,71
E (if40 mm< t 5 100 mm) 1 0,96 0,84 0,78 0,74
99
]Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - V Classification of cross-sections I
Table V.9 Limiting values of axial load NSd for web classificationof Z cross-sections
subject to axial load NSd and to bending according to major axis Mysd
100 -0,280 -0,170

105 -0,3 14 -0,210
110 6 2
5 -0,245
115 z. -0,345
-0,374 0 -0,278
120 U -0,400 -0,308
124
125
-0,419
-0,424
-0,33 1
-0,336
I I 0,000
-0,004
130 -0,446 .E-l -0,362 z.
n -0,023
135 -0,467 -0,385
140 -0,486 -0,407
145
150
-0,503
-0.520
-0,428
-0,447
- -0,085
11 *> means no limits of applied axial load NSd for web classification.
11 Values of d, t, are defined in table V.2 I A, = d.t, (web area); A = sectional area
Table V.10 Examples of shift of centroidal axis of effective cross-sections
1. in case of monosymmetrical class 4 cross-sections submitted to uniform compression

(Ncompression) :
2. in case of class 4 cross-sections submitted to bending (My.Sd) :
1 1My.Sd
1
eM
Notes :
- 1-1 - centroidal axis of gross cross-section
- 2-2 - centroidal axis of effective cross-section
- elements :
non-effective zone of the element, taking into account the

occurence of local buckling.
101
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension 1
VI MEMBERS IN TENSION (Ntension)
F-- - - - \
Previous page
is blank '
'\ i
103
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension I
VI MEMBERS IN TENSION (Ntension)
V1.a Generalities
(1) For each load case (see chapter 111) the global analysis of the frame (see chapter IV)
determines the design values for the following internal force which is applied to members
in tension and which shall be checked at ultimate limit states :
Z
*.e. Y Nx.Sd
.X - -+
(2) The flow-chart VI.l presents the general procedure to check members in tension at
ultimate limit states (see the following page).
(3) The flow-chart VI.2 presents the particular procedure to check at ultimate limit states
angles connected by one leg and submitted to tension (see the second following page).
(4) The table VI.l provides a list of the checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for
the member submitted to axial tension (Ntension).A member shall have sufficient bearing
capacity if all the checks (from @( 1) to @(4)) are fulfilled. Several checks (from @(2) to
@(4)) concern particular cases with specific conditions. All the checks have both
references to Eurocode 3 and to the design handbook.
Previous page
is blank
105
~
~
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension 1
Flow-chart VI. 1 : Members in tension (Ntension)
UmK
m
*
Determine ULS load cases
ULS checks
1
Select beam size (A, Anet) and steel grade (4 3
- .
f Determine the design tensile force from
global analysisof the structure:
I 4
NSd
Calculate the design plastic resistance 5

of the gross cross-section : NpLRd
Calculate the design ultimate resistance

of the net cross-section (Anet) at holes for fasteners: 6
Nu.Rd
Determine the design tension resistance

of the cross-section: 7
Nt.Rd = min (NpLRd, Nu.Rd)
f Adopt section 1 9
106
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension 1
Flowchart VI.2 : Angles connected by one leg and submitted to tension
I I
Determine ULS load cases
I 2 ULS checks 2
Select stronger section
~~ ~~
3 Select angle size (A, Anet) and steel grade (fy, fu) 3
4
4 global analysis of the structure: 4
Calculate the design plastic resistance

5 of the gross cross-section : NprRd 5
6
Angle connected 6
by one leg
/
7 7
8 8
of an equivalent equal-leg ‘Consider A*equal to the’
angle of leg size equal to that gross area of the angle
9 9
I
I
Bolted I Welded lap joint
I0 l connection connection end connection I I0
I1
I2
13
[Calculate the net section
A*netfromA*
I of the bolted net section or welded gross section:

Q Use A*
I
I1
12
I3
Determine the design tension resistance

of the cross-section:
14 Nt.Rd = min (NpLRd, Nu.Rd) I4
I5 NSd s Nt.Rd I5
I6 f- Adopt section 16
107
)Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension 1
~~
rable VI.l List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in tension (Ntension)
3 Axial tensile force Nx.Sd : References :
6* General case:
(1) Resistance of gross cross-section to Nxsd :
[5.4.3 (I)] Nx.Sd 5 Np,rRd (design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section) VI.b.1 (1)
** Particular cases:
(2) Resistance of the net cross-section to Nxsd if holes forfasteners:
[5.4.3 (I)] Nx.Sd 5 N u R d (design resistance of the net cross-section considering the net VI.b.2 (1)
[5.4.2.2] area of a member or element cross-section, het)
(3) Resistance of net cross-section to Nx.Sd if angle connected by a

single row of bolts in one leg:
[6.5.2.3 (2)] Nx.Sd 5 Nu.Rd (design ultimate resistance of the net cross-section,A,.,,t) VI.c.1 (1)
considering the following cases for determination of Anet :
- either, if unequal-leg angle connected by its smaller leg:
Anet is the net section area of an equivalent equal-leg angle
of leg size equal to that of the smaller leg,
- or, in other cases (equal-leg angle or unequal-leg angle
connected by its larger leg) :
Anet is the net section area of the angle
(4) Resistance of cross-section to Nx.Sd if angle connected by
[6.6.10 (2)] welding in one leg:
[6.6.10 (3)] Nx.sd 5 N u R d (design ultimate resistance of the cross-section, A) VI.c.2 (1)
considering the following cases for determination of A :
A = the gross cross-section area of an equivalent equal-leg
angle of leg size equal to that of the smaller leg,
- or, in other cases (equal-leg angle or unequal-leg angle
connected by its larger leg) :
A = the gross cross-section area of the angle
V1.b General verifications at ULS

VI.b.1 Resistance of gross cross-section to Nkmion
(1) For members in axial tension the design value of the tensile force Nx.Sd at each cross-
section shall be checked for gross section yielding :
p 4 . 3 (I)]
where NpLRd is the design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section,

A is the gross cross-section (see table VI.2),
f,, is the yield strength (see table II.4),
W O is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
108
~ [Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension I
I VI.b.2 Resistance of net cross-section to Ntemion
(1) For members in axial tension the design value of the tensile force Nx.Sd at each cross-
section shall be checked for net section rupture at holes for fasteners :
[5.4.3(l)]
where NuRd is the design ultimate resistance of the net cross-section,

[5.4.2.2] Anet is the net area of a member or element cross-section with appropriate
deductions for all holes and other openings (see table V1.2),
fu is the ultimate tensile strength (see table II.4),
m2 is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
Table VI.2 Gross and net cross-sections

Note : A = gross cross-section
Anet = net area of cross-section
Nx.Sd ;I $-;+
- Nx. Sd
4- -==- I 1 =-+
I +@--
I I .
I
~ ~
2) Staggered holes : 112 13

I I
I I
Nx .Sd
--+
Nx.Sd
-A = section 3-3 _s_I_s_ 1: ;2 ;3

- Anet = smaller of (section 1-1; section 2-2)
3) Angles with holes in both legs :

n
-p = spacing of the centres of the same two holes measured
perpendicular to the member axis
109
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension
v1.c Particular verifications at ULS for angles connected by one leg
f5.4.3(311 (1) In these particular cases the effects of eccentricities in the connections may be neglected
with the following considerations of this chapter. Those considerations should also be
given in a similar way to other types of sections connected through outstands such as T-
sections ( T ) and channels ( [ ).
(2) The flow-chart VI.2 intends to present the particular cases of this chapter.
VI.c.1 Connection with a single row of bolts
[65.2.3(2)] (1) Angles in tension (Nx.Sd) connected by a single row of bolts in one leg may be treated as
concentrically loaded with the following requirements :
2,0(e2 -0,5d0)t f,
for a 1 bolt connection : Nx.Sd Nu.Rd = 9
for a 3 bolts connection : 9
where NuXd is the design ultimate resistance of the net section,

e2 is the edge distance from the center of a fastener hole to the adjacent edge
of the angle (see table VI.4),
& is the hole diameter,
t is the material thickness,
f, is the ultimate tensile strength (see table E4),
y ~ 2 is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2),
P2, P3 are reduction factors dependent on the pitch p1 (see table VI.3),
Anet is the net area of the angle (see table VI.4) :
- if unequal-leg angle connected by its smaller leg, then Anet = net section
area of an equivalent equal-leg angle of leg size equal to that smaller leg,
- or, in other cases (equal-leg angle or unequal-leg angle connected by its
larger leg) : Anet = the net section area of the angle.
-.., Ir d
Pitch pi 52,5do 3,3 do 3,75& 4,2& 2 5 do

2 bolts P2 0,4 0,5 0,55 0,6 077
3 bolts and more P3 OS 096 0,7
For intermediate values of p1 the values of P2 and P3 may be determined by linear

interpolation.
110
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension I
Fable VI.4 Connection of angles
1) Parameters for bolted connections :
2) Anet,net area of the bolted angle :

2.1) if unequal-leg angle connected by its smaller leg :
2.2) if unequal-leg angle connected by its larger leg or if equal-leg angle :
3) A, cross-sectional area of the welded angle :

3.1) if unequal-leg angle connected by its smaller leg :
I
.
3.2) if unequal-leg angle connected by its larger leg of if equal-leg angle :
TI
111
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI Members in tension I
VI.c.2 Connection by welding
[6.6.10(2)] (1) Angles in tension (Nx.Sd) welded by one leg may be treated as concentrically loaded with
the following assumptions :
I- Nx.Sd Nu.Rd =-
where Nu&d is the design ultimate resistance of the cross-section,

A is the cross-sectional area of the angle (see table V1.4) :
- if unequal-leg angle welded by its smaller leg then A = the gross cross-
section area of an equivalent equal-leg angle of leg size equal to that of
the smaller leg,
- or, in other cases (equal-leg angle or unequal-leg angle welded by its
larger leg) : A = the gross cross-section area of the angle,
fy is the yield strength (see table II.4),
~ M O is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
112
i EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VII Members in compression 1
VII MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION (Ncompression)

[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VlI Members in compression
VII MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION (Ncompression)
VII.a Generalities
determines the design value for the following internal force which is applied to members
in compression and which shall be checked at ultimate limit states:
Z
I
-.=Y Nx.Sd
-X - -+-
I
,
Z
(2) The flow-chart VI1 presents the general procecldre to check members in compression at
ultimate limit states (see the following page).
(3) The table VII.1 provides a list of the checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for
the member submitted to axial compression (Ncompression).A member shall have sufficient
bearing capacity if all the checks (from @(1) to @(9)) are fulfilled. Several checks (from
a(3) to a(9)) concern particular cases with specific conditions. All the checks have both
references to Eurocode 3 and to the design handbook.
Previous page
is blank
115
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VII Members in compression 1
*
Flow-chart VI1 : Members in compression (Ncompression)
f Determine ULS load cases]

ULS checks 2
( Determine the design tensile force from global analysis of the structure: Nsd) 4
Classify the cross-section in compression 5
,--------------
Class of cross-section 6
Calculate effective area of cross-section 7

Aeff and ratio BA = Aeff/ A
8
9
10
,----------
I
‘ - - - -7 -----
Buckling resistance of the member
’ -1
I
11
I _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ 12
_ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I
of centroidal axis: eN
Determine the buckling length Lb 1 13
of the member for each axis :Lb.y, Lb.z additional bending
t &l=N.eN 14
Class of cross-section to be checked with (N,M) interaction
I- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 I-- - - - - - - - 1 15
I Class 1.2 or 3 cross-section I I Class 4 cross-section I
16
culate the non-dimensional s l e n d e e s
ratio hiof the member for each buckling axis: AY,AZ
+ 17
(Multiply %y and% by q~) 18
I I Select appropriate buckling curve I 1 .z

L: 19
U
E
(Determinelthe reduction factor x for each bucldling axis: x,,
i i -.e.
a
1,
20
Calcpate the design buckling resistance’ofthe

member Nb.Rd for each buckling axis: Nby.dd, NbzRd -
91
21
+
U:
dtiply Nby.Rd and NbzRd by BA

I 22
NSd 5 min(Nby.Rd, NbzRd)

23
ves A
( Adopt section 1
24
116
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildinPS - VII Members in compression I
I'able VII.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in compression
(Ncompression)
3 Axial compressive force Nx.sd : References :

k* General cases:
:I) Resistance of cross-section to Nx.sd :
p 4 . 4 (l)] Nx.Sd I Nc.Rd (design compression resistance of the cross-section) VII.c.1 (1)
3 Stability of member to Nx.sd :
[5.5.1.1 (111 Nx.Sd Nb.Rd (design flexural buckling resistance of the member) VII.c.2.1 (2)
and, Nx.Sd 5 design torsional buckling resistance of member vII.c .2.2
[Annex G]
[Annex G] and, Nx.Sd I design flexural-torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
k* Particular cases:
3) Resistance of cross-section to Nx.Sd, if class 4 monosymmetrical cross-

section:
[5.4.8.3 (2)] interaction (Nx.Sd ,AMy.Sd, AM,.sd) 2 1 VII.d.1 (1)
where h M s d =Nx.Sd.eN (= additional moment due to the eccentricity of the
centroidal axis of the effective cross-section, eN)
[4) Stability of member to Nx.sd if class 4 monosymmetrical cross-section:

w . 4 (511 interaction (Nx.Sd, AMy.Sd, AMz.Sd) I 1 VII.d.2 (1)
where h M S d =Nx.Sd.eN (= additional moment due to the eccentricity of the
(5) Stability of member to Nx.sd

if class 4 monosymmetrical cross-section,
i f e ~ , # 0 and,
[5.5.2 (7)] if XLT > 0,4(potential lateral-torsional buckling): VIII.e.2 (3)
hteraction (Nx.Sd AMy.Sd m z . S d ) 5 1
7 9
VII.d.2 (2)
[5.5.4 (6)]
where h M S d =N,.sd.eN (= additional moment due to the eccentricity of the
( 6 ) Resistance of net cross-section to Nxsd if angle connected by a single

row of bolts in one leg:
[6.5.2.3 (2)] Nx.Sd 5 Nu.Rd (design ultimate resistance of the net cross-section, Anet) VI1.e. 1.1(1)
considering the following cases for determination of Anet:
Anet is the net section area of an equivalent equal-leg angle of
leg size equal to that of the smaller leg,
- or, in other cases (equal-leg angle or unequal-leg angle connected
by its larger leg) :
Anet is the net section area of the angle
(checks nr @ to be continued:
117
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildinas - VII Members in compression 1
Table VII.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in compression
(Ncompression)
@ Axial compressive force Nx.sd : References :

** Particular cases: (continuation)
(7) Stability of member to Nx.Sd i f angle connected by a single row of bolts
in one leg:,
[65.2.3(3)] Nx.Sd < Nbad (design flexural buckling resistance of the member considering the VILe. 1.2 (1)
gross cross-sectional area of the angle, A)
With Nbxd 5 Nu.Rd (design ultimate resistance of the net cross-section presented in @(6))
(8) Resistance of cross-section to Nxsd if angle connected by welding in
one leg:
[6.6.10(211
[6.6.10(3)] Nx.Sd5 Nu.Rd (design ultimate resistance of the cross-section,A) VII.e.2.1 (1)
considering the following cases for determination of A:
A is the gross cross-section area of an equivalent equal-leg
angle of leg size equal to that of the smaller leg,
- or, in other cases (equal-leg angle or unequal-leg angle connected
by its larger leg) :
A is the gross cross-section area of the angle
(9) Stability of member to Nx.sd i f angle connected by welding in one leg:
[6.6.10(3)]
Nx.Sd < NbRd (design flexural buckling resistance of the member considering the
VII.e.2.2 (1)
gross cross-sectional area of the angle, A)
VILb Classification of cross-sections
(1) At ultimate limit states the resistance of cross-sections may be limited by its local buckling
resistance. In order to take into account that limitation the different elements (flange, web)
of the cross-sections shall be classified according to the rules defined in chapter V.
(2) For cross-sections submitted to uniform compression (Nx.Sd) the classification may
specifically be determined according to the procedure defined in chapter V.d. 1.
118
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VII Members in compression I
vII.c General verifications at ULS

VII.c.1 Resistance of cross-section to Nfompr-ion
[5.4.4(1)] (1) For members in axial compression, the design value for the compressive force Nx.Sd at
each cross-section shall satisfy:
Nc.Rd depending on classes of cross-section:
Class 1,2 or 3 class 4
A fY -
- Aeff fy
[form. (5.16)] Nx.Sd Nc.Rd = Npf .Rd =-
YMO YMl
where Nc.Rd is the design compression resistance of the gross cross-section,
NpLRd is the design plastic resistance of the cross-section,
A is the area of the gross cross-section,
Aeff is the effective area of the cross-section (see chapter V),
fY is the yield strength (see table I1.4),
WO, y ~ 1 are partial safety factors (see table 1.2).
[5.4.4(5)] (2) Fastener holes need not to be allowed for in compression members, except for oversize
and slotted holes.
VII.c.2 Stability of member to Ncompresion
(1) The stability of members submitted to concentrical compressive force shall be checked
according to the following buckling modes : flexural buckling, torsional buckling and
flexural-torsional buckling.
VII.c.2.1 Resistance to flexural buckling
(1) The compression members shall be checked to flexural buckling mode (buckling by plane
bending) according to both principal axes of the section (major axis: yy; minor axis: zz)
with the appropriate buckling lengths (LbSy, Lb.z).
[s.s.i.i (i)] (2) For members in axial compression the design value of the compressive force Nx.Sd shall
satisfy:
b I
I Nb.Rd depending on classes of cross-section:

I
Class 1,2 or 3 Class 4
[form. (5.45)] Nx.Sd Nby.Rd
- XY * f Y - x y Aeff fy
YMI YM1
- xz A fy x z Aeff fy
-
Nx.Sd NbzRd
YMl YMl
where Nby.Rd, Nbz.Rd, Nb.Rd are the design buckling resistances of compression
member about y and z axes, and in general,
xy, x z are the reduction factors for the buckling mode about y
and z axes,
A is the area of the gross cross-section,
Aeff is the effective area of the cross-section (see chapter V),
fY is the yield strength (see table II.4),
YM1 is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
119
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI1 Members in compression 1
p5.1.2 (111 (3) For constant axial compression in members of constant cross-section,
- - - the value of x ay,
xz ) is related to the appropriate non-dimensional slenderness h (A,, A,) :
where $ = O,5[l+a(h-O,2)+?] ,
a . is an imperfection factor (see table VII.2), depending on the appropriate
buckling curve.
The buckling reduction factor x is given in function of % and the appropriate buckling
curve in table VII.6. When % I 0 , 2 flexural buckling is not a potential failure mode.
11 Table VII.2 Imperfection factors a I

Buckling curve ag a b C d
Imperfection factor a 0,13 0,21 0,34 0,49 0,76
(4) The appropriate buckling curve of a member depends on the type of cross-section. For
hot-rolled I-sections the buckling curve also depends on steel grades (see table VII.4).
- -
(5) The non-dimensional slendernesses (h,,h,) shall be taken as:
where hl is the Euler slenderness for buckling (see table VII.3),

PA is a factor considering the effect of local buckling if class 4 cross-section:
(pA=l],for class 1,2 or 3 cross-sections,
Ip,+ I ,for class 4 cross-sections.
(h,,h,) are the slendernesses of the member:
[form.(5.47)]
where Lb.y, Lb.z are the buckling lengths of the member about y and z
axes,
i,, iz are the radius of gyration about the y and z axes determined
using the properties of the gross cross-section (Iy, Iz and A),
Steel grade S 235 S 275 s 355 S 420 S 460

93,91 86,81 76,41 70,25 67,12
120
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VII Members in compression I
15.5.1.4 (l)]
rable VII.4 Selection of buckling curve for a cross-section
I
[table 5.5.31
Buckling Buckling curves

Cross-section Limits for steel grades
aboutaxis I S 235
to s 355
I S420 S 460
Rolled I-sections : with h/b > 1,2 and :

. tf 540mm ag
ag
. 40<tf I~OOIYNII a
a
with h/b I1,2 and :
tf 5 100 mm a
a
Z with any h/b and : C

tf > 100 mm
C
Welded I-sections :
Z Z
if tf I 4 0 mm
yy
ZZ I b
C
if tf > 40 mm YY C
zz d
I
Hollow sections :
I
hot finished a
-@- any
-m--@-
I I
b
I
Welded box sections : generally as

T. (except as below) b
~ ~~
thick welds and

b/tf C 30 YY C
h/t, < 30 ZZ C
1 bZ 1
Angles, channels, tees and solid sections :
C
-
Vote : *) fyb is the basic yield strength of the flat steel material before cold forming
121
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI1 Members in compression I
[5.5.1.5 (l)] (6) The buckling length Lb (Lb.,,, Lb.z) of a compression member with both ends effectively
[55.1.5 (2)] held in position laterally may conservatively be taken as equal to its system length L; or
alternatively, the buckling length may be determined using informative Annex E of
Eurocode 3.
Buckling lengths of columns in a non-sway mode are provided in table VIIS for different
boundary conditions.
rable VII.5 , Buckling length of column : Lt,
System
Buckling
length Lb
2L
0,7 L
0,5 L
[5.8.3] (7) For angles in compression (Nx.sd) connected with appropriate fixity (at least two bolts if
bolted) the eccentricities may be neglected if following effective slenderness ratios %E
,
are used to determine the design buckling resistance (Nb.Rd) of compression angles.
-
buckling about the vv axis: heff."= 0,35+ 0,7%,
= 0,50 + 0,7 %,
buckling about the yy or zz axis:
- - -
h,e., = 0,50 + 0,7 x,
where h, ,k,,h, are non-dimensional slenderness ratios respectively about vv axis, yy
axis and zz axis (axes are defined in table 0.1).
122
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VII Members in compression 1
[table 5.5.21
rable VII.6 Reduction factors x = f(h)
- x for buckling curve
h
ag a b C d
1,0000 1,0000 1,0000 1,0000 1,0000
0,9859 0,9775 0,9641 0,949 1 0,9235
0,9701 0,9528 0,9261 0,8973 0,8504
0,95 13 0,9243 0,8842 0,8430 0,7793
0,9276 0,8900 0,837 1 0,7854 0,7 100
0,8961 0,8477 0,7837 0,7247 0,6431
0,8533 0,7957 0,7245 0,6622 0,5797
0,796 1 0,7339 0,6612 0,5998 0,5208
0,7253 0,6656 0,5970 0,5399 0,467 1
0,6482 0,5960 0,5352 0,4842 0,4189

0,5732 0,5300 0,4781 0,4338 0,3762
0,5053 0,4703 0,4269 0,3888 0,3385
0,446 1 0,4179 0,3817 0,3492 0,3055
0,3953 0,3724 0,3422 0,3145 0,2766
0,3520 0,3332 0,3079 0,2842 0,2512
0,3 150 0,2994 0,278 1 0,2577 0,2289
0,2833 0,2702 0,2521 0,2345 0,2093
0,2559 0,2449 0,2294 0,2141 0,1920
0,2323 0,2229 0,2095 0,1962 0,1766
0,2117 0,2036 0,1920 0,1803 0,1630

0,1937 0,1867 0,1765 0,1662 0,1508
0,1779 0,1717 0,1628 0,1537 0,1399
0,1639 0,1585 0,1506 0,1425 0,1302
0,1515 0,1467 0,1397 0,1325 0,1214
0,1404 0,1362 0,1299 0,1234 0,1134
0,1305 0,1267 0,121 1 0,1153 0,1062
0,1216 0,1182 0,1132 0,1079 0,0997
0,1136 0,1105 0,1060 0,1012 0,0937
0,1063 0,1036 0,0994 0,095 1 0,0882
VII.c.2.2 Resistance to torsionnal buckling and to flexural-torsional buckling
p.5.i.i (3)] (1) In some cases the torsional or flexural-torsional buckling modes may govern. Reference
may be made to the Annex G of Eurocode 3 which is not officially available yet.
123
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VI1 Members in compression
VII.d Particular verifications at ULS for class 4 monosymmetrical cross-section
(1) This chapter concerns monosymmetrical cross-sections (channels ([), T-sections fl)and
angles (L): see table 0.1) which are class 4 in uniform compression.
(2) Monosymmetrical class 4 effective cross-section subject to uniform compression induces a
shift of the centroidal axis eN (see chapter V). An additional bending moment AM due to
that eccentricity of the centroidal axis eN shall be taken into account:
I5.3.5 (7)]
(3) The criteria presented in this chapter VI1.d may be used for uniaxial and biaxial bending.
VlI.d.1 Resistance of cross-section to Nmmprmion
[5.4.4 (3)] (1) For members of class 4 monosymmetrical cross-section submitted to axial compression,
the design values of the compressive force Nx.Sd combined with bending moment AMSd
shall satisfy in each cross-section:
[5.4.8.3]
where the interaction formula is given in chapter IX.d. 1.4,,

AMy.Sd = Nx.Sd eNy , is the additional bending moment about major axis due to the
eccentricity of the centroidal axis y (eNy) of the effective
cross-section subject to uniform compression Nx.Sd,
AM,.sd = Nx.Sd eNz , is the additional bending moment about minor axis due to the
eccentricity of the centroidal axis z (eNz) of the effective
cross-section subject to uniform compression Nx.Sd.
VII.d.2 Stability of member to Ncompresion

(1) For members of class 4 monosymmetrical cross-section submitted to axial compression,
the design value of the compressive force Nx.Sd combined with bending moment M S d
shall satisfy:
15.5.4 (511
where the interaction formula is given in table IX.6 (see cllapter IX.r 2.2) 9
AMy.Sd = Nx.Sd eNy (see VII.d. l),

AMz.Sd = Nx.Sd eNz (see VI1.d. 1).
[5.5.2 (7)] (2) If there is an eccentricity of the centroidal axis about major axis y (eNy), then it induces an
additional bending moment about major axis (hMy.sd). In that case, if the appropriate non-
- I
dimensional slenderness 1 k >~0,4~1(see chapter VIII.e.2), then lateral-torsional buckling

is a potential failure mode and a supplementary check has to be taken into account as
follows :
[5.5.4 (6)]
where the interaction formula is given in table IX.7 (see chapter IX.d.2.2) ,
AMy.Sd = Nx.Sd eNy (see VII.d. I),
AMZ.Sd = Nx.Sd eNz (see VI1.d. 1).
124
\Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VU Members in compression
M1.e Particular verifications at ULS for angle connected by one leg
p 4 . 3 (311 (1) In these particular cases the effects of eccentricities in the connections may be neglected
thanks to the following considerations of chapter VII.e. Those considerations should also
be given in a similar way to other types of sections connected through outstands such as T-
sections (T) and channels ([).
VII.e.1 Connection with a single row of bolts
VII.e.l.1 Resistance of cross-section to Ncompression

[6.5.2.3 (2)] (1) Angles in compression (N,.Sd) connected by a single row of bolts in one leg may be
treated as concentrically loaded with the following requirements:
where Nu.Rd is the design ultimate resistance of net cross-section (see chapter vI.c.1).
VII.e.l.2 Stability of member to Ncompresion

t6.5.2.3 (3)] (1) For angles in axial compression connected by a single row of bolts in one leg , the design
value of the compressive force Nx.Sd shall satisfy:
1- but
where Nb.Rd is the design buckling resistance of the compression angle (see chapter
VII.c.2.1 (2)), where the gross cross-sectional area of the angle (A) is
used,
N u R d is the design ultimate resistance of net cross-section (see chapter VI.c.l),
where the net area of the angle (Anet>is used.
VII.e.2 Connection by welding
VII.e.2.1 Resistance of cross-section to Ncompr-ion

[6.6.10 (3)] (1) Angles in compression (N,.Sd) welded by one leg may be treated as concentrically loaded
with the following requirements:
1-
where Nu.Rd is the design ultimate resistance of cross-section (see chapter vI.c.2).
VII.e.2.2 Stability of member to Ncompresion

[6.6.10 (3)] (1) For angles in axial compression welded by one leg , the design value of the compressive
force Nx.Sd shall satisfy:
where Nb.Rd is the design buckling resistance of the compression angle (see chapter
VII.c.2.1 (2)), where the gross cross-sectional area of the angle (A) is
used.
125
I
1 EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending I
VIII MEMBERS IN BENDING (V ;M ;(V,M))
r Previous
--
page \'
is blank
127
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending I
VILI MEMBERS IN BENDING (V ;M ;(V,M))
V1II.a Generalities
determines the design values for the following effects of actions which are applied to
members in bending and which shall be checked at serviceability limit states and at
ultimate limit states :
- ForSLS: .
vertical deflections (&),
.
vibrations (f)
- For ULS: separate or combined shear forces and bending moments :
2
I
Mz.Sd
I
I
.Y
-X
Vz.Sd
i
I .--.
My.Sd
(2) The flow-chart VIII presents the general procedure to check I-section members in bending
at SLS and at ULS (see the following page).
(3) The table VIII.l provides a list of the checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for
the member in bending (V; M; (V,M)). A member shall have sufficient bearing capacity if
all the checks are fulfilled according to the loading applied to that member. For instance,
in the case of loading nr 0, all checks from O(1)to @(3) have to be satisfied. Several
checks in the table VIII.1 concern particular cases with specific conditions. All the checks
have both references to Eurocode 3 and to the design handbook.
The table VIII. 1 proposes the following loadings applied to the member:
@ Interaction of shear force and uniaxial bending moment ( V S d , M S d ) :

(Vz.Sd and My.Sd) or (Vy.Sd and M z S d )
@ Interaction of shear forces and biaxial bending moments ( V S d , My.Sd, M,sd :
( V z S d and M y . S d and ( v y . S d and M z S d )
Previous page
is blank
129
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending I
Flow-chart VI11 : Design of I members in uniaxial bending (Vz;My;(Vz,My)) or (Vy;Mz;(Vy,Mz))
Determine ULS load cases Determine SLS load cases 1
2
t t
f
\
I
I
Lr
Select beam size (A, I, We4 Wpg and steel grade (fy) I
I
I
3
4
etermine vertical deflectio 4
and design bending moments (My.Sd ; M z S d ) and vibrations
5
t
no
(Calculate shear resistance of cross-section V p m ) 6
7
A no
I 8
1 -
lassify the cross-section in bending; if class 4 calculate

9
10
11
12
/
Calculate design bending moment

resistance of cross-section Mc.Rd 13
14
15
16
>a
Consider MV.Rd = Mc.Rd Calculate MV.Rd
$.
( calculate Mcy.Rd for the class of the cross-section )
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
I [Calculate the slenderness ratio XLT 25
26
no
Yes 27
i no I
calculate Mb.Rd- 28
design lateral-torsional
euckling resistance momenJ
no --, I
29
Adout section if both series I J J 30
130
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending 1
rableVlII.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in bending

according to the applied internal forces andor moments(V;M;(V,M))
0 ShearforceVSd : References :
(1) Resistance of cross-sectionto v s d :
[5.4.6 (l)]
VSd 5 Vpl.Rd (design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section)
V1II.d. 1 (1)
[6.5.2.2(l)] (2) Resistance of cross-section to v z . S d , i f web with a group of fastener table VIII.6
holes near the end of a beam :
[6.5.2.2 (2)] Vz.Sd 5 Veff.Rd (design value of the effective resistance to block shear) VIII.d.1 (3)
[5.6.1 (l)] (3) Stability of web to VZ.SdJ ifdlt, > 6 9 :~ table VIII.7
[5.6.3 (l)] Vz.Sd I Vbaxd (design shear buckling resistance) VIIl.d.2 (5)
@ biaxial bending moment MSd :
(1) Resistance of cross-sectionto MSd:
[5.4.5.1 (l)]
[5.4.5.1 (211 MSd 5 Mcxd (design uniaxial bending moment resistance of the cross-section) VIII.e.1 (1)
[5.5.2 (7)] (2) Stability of member to M y s d if ~ L >

T 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
r5.5.2 (l)] My.Sd 5 Mb.Rd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member) VIII.e.2 (4)
@ Biaxial bending moments (My.sd, M,sd :

(1) Resistance of cross-sectionto (My.Sd kfz.sd): VIII.f.l (1)
[5.4.8.1] interaction (My.Sd , Mz.Sd) 5 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-section K.d. 1.2 (2)
[5.4.8.21 for class 3 cross-section IX.d. 1.3 (1)
[5.4.8.3] for class 4 cross-section K.d. 1.4 (1)
(2) Stability of member to ( M y . s d Mz.sd): VIII.f.2 (1)
[5.5.4 (l)] interaction (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-section table IX.4
[5.5.4 (3)] for class 3 cross-section table IX.5
[5.5.4(5)] for class 4 cross-section table IX.6
[5.5.2 (7)] (3) Stability of member to M y s d , if ~ L >
T OJ4O: VIII.e.2 (3)
[5.5.2 (111 My.Sd 2 Mb.Rd ' (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member: VIII.e.2 (4)
[5.5.2 (7)] (4) Stability of member to ( M y . S d MzSd), if ILT> 0,40 (potential VIII.e.2 (3)
lateral-torsional buckling) : VIII.f.2 (2)
[5.5.4 (2)] interaction (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-section table IX.4
131
TableVIII.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in bending

according to the applied internal forces andor momentsW;M
8 Interaction of shear force and uniaxial bending moment ( V S ~M, s ):~ References :
If VSd I 0,5 Vpl.Rd then interaction (VSd, MSd ) is not considered and VIII.d.l (1)
[5.4.7 (2)]
checks nr @ and nr @ of this table VIII.l shall be performed, with the vm.g.1 (1)
following check nr @ (6). I
[5.4.7 (3)] If v s d > 0 5 V p l J d then interaction (VSd, MSd ) has to be considered and vII1.g. 1.1 (1)
following checks shall be carried out :
Resistance of cross-section to V S d :
[5.4.6 (l)] VSd 5 Vpl.Rd (design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section) VIII.d.1 (1)
[6.5.2.2 (l)] Resistance of cross-section to V Z S d , if web with a group of fastener table VIII.6
holes near the end of the beam :
[6.5.2.2 (2)] Vz.Sd 5 Veffxd (design value of the effective resistance to block shear) VIII.d.1 (3)
Resistance of cross-section to M S d :
[5.45.1 (l)] (design uniaxial bending moment resistance of the cross-section) VIII.e.1 (1)
r5.4.5.1 (2)]
MSd I Mc.Rd
[5.5.2 (7)] Stability of member to M y s d , if ~ L >

T 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
[5.5.2 (l)] My.Sd IMb.Rd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member) VIII.e.2 (4)
Resistance of cross-section to ( V S d , MSd):
[5.4.7 (311 MSd I Mv.Rd (design plastic resistance moment reduced by shear force) VIII.g.l.l( 1)
[5.6.1 (l)] Stability of web to ( V Z S d , M y S d ) , ifdlt, > 6 9 :~ table VIII.7
One of the three following checks ((6.1), (6.2), (6.3)) shall be
fulfilled :
[5.6.7.2(111 (6.1) If My.Sd 5 MfXd (design plastic moment resistance of cross-section with JIII.g.2(3) A
the flanges only)
then Vz.Sd I Vba.Rd (design shear buckling resistance of the web) VIII.d.2 (5)
[5.6.7.2 (2)] (6.2) If My.Sd > Mf.Rd and Vz.Sd 5 075 Vba.Rd JIII.g.2(3) B
then My.Sd < Mcyxd (design uniaxial bending moment resistance of the VIII.e.1 (1)
cross-section)
[5.6.7.2 (3)] (6-3) If My.Sd > Mf.Rd and Vz.Sd > O15Vba.Rd VIII.g.2(3) C
then My.Sd Idesign moment resistance reduced by shear VIII.g.2(3) C
buckling (interaction (Vz.Sd, My.sd))
and, My.Sd 5 Mcy.Rd VIII.e.1 (1)
and, Vz.Sd I Vba.Rd VIII.d.2 ( 5 )
I 132
[Ref. EC 3 for non-swaybuildings - VIII Members in bending I
,
TableVIII.1 List of checks to be Derformed at ULS for the member in bending

according to the applied internal forces andor moments(V;M :V,M))
@ Interaction of shear forces and biaxial bending moments References :
(VSd, My.Sd, M z S d :
f5.4.7 (2)] If VSd I 0 , 5 VplRd then interaction (VSd, My.Sd, Mz.Sd) is not considered VIII.d.1 (1)
and checks nr @ and nr @ of this table VIII. 1 shall be
performed, with the following check nr @ (7). VIII.g.1 (1)
[5.4.7 (3)] If vsd > 03 Vpl&d then interaction (VSd, M,.Sd, Mz.Sd) is to be VIII.g.l.1 (1)
considered and following checks shall be carried out :
Resistance of cross-section to VzSd:
[5.4.6 (l)] Vz.Sd IVplRd (design plastic shear resistance of the cross-section) VIII.d.1 (1)
[6.5.2.2 (l)] Resistance of cross-section to vsd, if web with a group of fastener table VIII.6
holes near the end of a beam :
[6.5.2.2 (2)] VSd 5 Veff.Rd (design value of the effective resistance to block shear) VIII.d.1 (3)
[5.5.2 (7)] Stability of member to M y s d , if ~ L >
T 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
[5.5.2 (l)] My.Sd 5 Mb.Rd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member) VIII.e.2 (4)
Stability of member to (My.sd, Mzsd): VIII.f.2 (1)
[5.5.4 (l)] interaction (My.Sd , Mz.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-section table IX.4
[5.5.4 (5)]
for class 4 cross-section table IX.6
[5.5.2 (7)] Stability of member to ( M y . S d , Mz.Sd), if ILT> 0,40 (potential VIII.e.2 (3)
lateral-torsionalbuckling) : VIII.f.2 (2)
p.5.4 (Z)] interaction (My.Sd , Mz.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-section table IX.4
[5.5.4 (411 for class 3 cross-section table IX.5
Resistance of cross-section to (Vsd, M y s d , Mzsd): V1II.g. 1.2

[5.4.8.1] interaction (My.Sd , Mz.Sd) 5 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-section vrI1.g. 1.2(2)
[5.4.8.2] for class 3 cross-section VII1.g. 1.2(3)
[5.4.8.31 for class 4 cross-section VII1.g. 1.2(3)
where design resistance moments are reduced by shear forces but
limited by appropriate values of moment resistance according to :
[5.4.7 (3)] MvRd (design plastic resistance moment reduced by shear force), VII1.g. 1.1 (1:
[5.4.5.1 (l)] with Mv.RdI Mc.Rd (design uniaxial bending moment resistance of the cross-section), VIII.e.1 (1)
[5.4.5.1 (2)]
in Other words, With Mvy.Rd5 Mcy.Rdand Mvz.Rd Mcz.Rd
(checks nr @ to be continued:
133
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending
TableVIII.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in bending

according to the applied internal forces andor moments(V;M
~_____
Interaction of shear forces and biaxial bending moments References :

(continuation) (Vsa, My.sd, M,sd) :
[5.6.1 (111 Stability of web (vz.sd,MY.sd), ifdlt, 6% : table VIII.7
One of the three following checks ((6.1), (6.2), (6.3)) shall be fulfilled :
[5.6.7.2(l)] (7.1) If My.Sd 5 MfRd (design plastic moment resistance of cross-section with /III.g.2(3) A
the flanges only)
then Vz.Sd IVba.Rd (design shear buckling resistance of the web) VIII.d.2 (5)
[5.6.7.2 (211 (7.2) If My.Sd > Mf.Rd and Vz.Sd 2 0,SVbaRd 'ITI.g.2(3) B
then My.Sd MqRd (design uniaxial bending moment resistance of the VIII.e.1 (1)
cross-section)
[5.6.7.2(311 (7.3) If MySd > Mf.Rd and Vz.Sd > 0,SVba.Rd JIII.g.2(3) C
then My.Sd I design moment resistance reduced by JIII.g.2(3) C
shear buckling (interaction (Vz.Sd, My.sd))
and, My.Sd 2 &y.Rd JIII.e.1 (1)
and, Vz.Sd 2 VbaRd VIII.d.2 (5)
Vm.b Verifications at SLS
VIII.b.1 Deflections
14.21
(1) Steel structures and components shall be so proportioned that deflections are within limits
agreed between the clients, the designer and the competent authority as being appropriate
to the intended use and occupancy of the building and the nature of the materials to be
supported.
(2) The deflections should be calculated making due allowance for any second order effects,
the rotational stiffness of any semi-rigid joints and the possible occurrence of any plastic
deformations at the serviceability limit state.
(3) The values given in table V111.2 are empirical values. They are intended for comparison
with the results of calculations and should not be interpreted as performance criteria.
[4.2.2 (I)] to
[4.2.2(3)] (4) The design values for the vertical deflections ($) (see chapters I11 and IV) should be
lower than the limiting values given in table VIII.2. Those limiting values are illustrated
by reference to the simply supported beam shown in table VIII.3.
' 134
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending 1
Table VIII.2 Recommended limiting values for vertical deflections

Ref. 4
Conditions Limits
table 4.2
6max 62
roofs generally L/200 * L/250
roofs frequently carrying personnel other than for maintenance L/250 W300
floors generally L/250 L/300
floors and roofs supporting brittle finish or non-flexible partitions LE50 W350
floors supporting columns (unless the deflection has been L/400 L/500
included in the global analysis for the ultimate limit state)
* where can impair the appearance of the building I L/250

I
I -
L = span of the beam; for cantilever beams : L = twice cantilever span
Discharge of rainwater:
slope of the roof less than 5% check that rainwater cannot collect in pools
slope of the roof less than 3% additional check that incremental collapse cannot occur
due to the weight of water
Ref. 4
table 4.1 Table VIII.3 Vertical deflections to be considered
6mm is the sagging in the
final state relative to the
straight line joining the
supports,
/ State 0 60 is t h e pre-camber
(hogging) of the beam in
the unloaded state (state
0) 3
61 is variation of the
deflection of the beam
due to permanent loads
State 2 (G) immediately after
4 b loading (state l),
L 62 is variation of the
deflection of the beam
due to the variable
loading (Q>(state 2).
135
VIII.b.2 -
Dynamic effects vibrations
l.31 (1) The vibrations of structures on which the public can walk shall be limited to avoid
significant discomfort to users.
(2) The design values for the effects of actions (vertical deflections (&) and natural frequency
(f)) (see chapters 111and IV) should be limited by the values given in table VIII.4. Those
limiting values may be relaxed where justified by high damping values.
Ref. 4
Table VIII.4 'Recommended limiting values for floor vibrations
table 4.4
f2fe WS1+62
Type of floor lowest natural frequency limited total deflection
fe [Hzl 61+ 62 Cmml
Floors over which people walk regularly 3 28
(offices, dwellings, ...)
Floors which are jumped or danced on
in a rhythmical manner (gymnasium, 5 10
dance hall, ...)
- fe natural frequency
- E modulus of elasticity
- I second moment of area
- L span
- m mass per unit length
- a coefficient of frequency of the basis mode vibration
L
I
L L
L w Y tr w w Y
tr Y
1 a = 9,869 ~~
I a = 22,37 a = 3,516 I a = 15,418
VIII.c Classification of cross-section
(1) At ultimate limit states the resistance of cross-section may be limited by its local buckling
(2) For cross-sections submitted to bending moments (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) the classification may
specifically be determined accordinn to the procedure defined in chaDter V.d.2.
136
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending 1
V1II.d Verifications at ULS to shear force VSd
VIII.d.1 Resistance of cross-section to VSd
[5.4.6 (l)]
(1) For members submitted to shear force the design value of the shear force VSd (Vz.Sd,
Vy.Sd) at each cross-section shall satisfy :
[form. (5.20)]
3
Vy.Sd Vpf.y.Rd - .\I?; yMo
where Vpfz.Rd ,Vp[.y.yRd are the design plastic shear resistances about z and y axes,
AV, ' AV, are the shear areas about z and y axes, given in table VIII.5,
fY is the yield strength (see table 11.4),
YmO is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
[5.4.6 (811 (2) Fastener holes need not be allowed for in shear verifications provided that:
[form. (5.21)]
where AV is the shear area (see table VIIIS),

fy is the yield strength (see table II.4),
f, is the ultimate tensile strength (see table II.4).
When Av.netiS less than this limit, an effective shear area of (fu/fy).Av.net may be assumed.
[6.5.2.2 (111 (3) Near the end of a member with a group of fastener holes in webs the "block shear" failure
shall be prevented by using appropriate hole spacing.
The design value of shear force (Vz.Sd) applied to the web shall satisfy :
where Veff.Rd is the design value of the effective resistance to block shear,
Av.net is the effective shear area (see table VIII.6),
f, is the ultimate tensile strength (see table II.4),
y ~ 2 is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
137
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIIl Members in bending
[5.4.6 (2)]
Table VI 1.5 Shear area A, for cross-sections
~ ~~~ ~~
Cross-sections Loading AV
Load
parallel A - 2btf + (tw+ 2r)tf
*I
lF
to web
Rolled
LWtf
Load
parallel
to &.y= 2btf + (tw + r) tw
IandH flanges
b
sections Load tf
parallel AV2 = (h - 2td tw
to web
Welded
Htf
*) Vy.Sd
Load
parallel
to Av.y = A - (h - 2tf) tw
flanges
*>
Rolled channel Load
sections parallel AV.2 = A - 2btf + (tw + r)tf
to web
*>
Load
parallel AV.2 =
Rolled rectangular to depth
hollow sections
of
uniform thickness Load
Ah
b+h
*>
Lbltl Vz.Sd
(Vy.Sd
parallel Ab
to AV, =
breadth b+h
Circular hollow sec1 .ons

and tubes of uniform th .chess
*>
6
Plates and solid bars A fa""
.:.:..:..:..
.,.x.:.
>
.
.=
.....
.....
A
.:.:.:.:.
..
-
Vote : *) A is the total cross-sectional area
Ref. 4 Table VIII.6 Determination of for block shear resistance

table 5.34
~~~~ >.:>..:.::.:.:.:
..*.:.:.:
:.:.:.
.::::::
.:..:.:..:..:,..
.....
.....
><:..
....
..s:
L2
&.net = t ( L + L1 + L2 - (n do))
L1 =5,0do Sal
L2 =2,5 do Sa2
t = web thickness
n = number of fastener holes on the block shear failure path
do = hole diameter
VIII.d.2 Stability of web to VzSd
[5.6.1 (i)] (1) If webs are submitted to shear force Vz.Sd and if their ratio exceeds the limits given in
I'wl
table VI11.7 then they shall be checked for resistance to shear buckling and transverse
[5.6.1 (4)] stiffeners shall be provided at supports.
Table VIII.7 Limiting width-to-thickness ratio related to the shear buckling in web
Profiles I Potential shear buckling to be checked if webs haw
a) For unstiffened webs :
i2
d
- >69&
tw
b) For stiffened webs :

The value of kTis defined in table VIII.9
I fy ( N / m 2 ) I 235 I 275 I 355 1 420 I 460
&=,pq ~(if140mm) 1 0,92 0,8 1 0,75 0,7 1
E (if 40 m < t I 1OOmm) 1 0,96 0,84 0,78 0,74
139
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending 1
(2) Nearly all hot-rolled I and H sections do not need to be checked for shear buckling.
[5.6.2(1)] (3) The shear buckling resistance may be verified using either :
- the simple post-critical method, or
- the tension field method.
The first method is presented hereafter.
[5.6.2(3)] (4)The simple post-critical method can be used for webs of I-section girders, with or without
intermediate transverse stiffeners, provided that the web has transverse stiffeners at the
supports.
(5) For webs with d/tw exceeding limits of table VIII.7, the design value of the shear force
Vz.Sd shall Satisfy :
[5.6.3(l)]
where VbaRd is the design shear buckling resistance,

d is the web depth (see table VIII.7),
tw is the web thickness,
Zba is the simple post-critical shear strength (see table VIII.8).
where fyw is the yield strength of the web,
-
hw is the web slenderness.
-
hW I0,8 0,8 < hw I 1 , 2 > 1,2
- f y w 0,9
Zba F
f
f,,(1,5 - 0,625xw) - -
4 43 & xw
(6) The web slenderness xwshould be determined from :
where E = ,/v ,given in table VIII.7,
kz is the buckling factor for shear given in table VIII.9,

where a is the clear spacing between transverse stiffeners.
I'able VIII.9 Buckling factor for shear kr
' 140
vm.e Verifications at ULS to bending moment MSd
vIn.e.1 Resistance of cross-section to MSd
(1) For members in bending and in absence of shear force, the design value of the bending
moment MSd (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) shall satisfy at each section without holes for fasteners :
Mc.Rd depending on classes of cross-section :

class 1 or 2 class 3 class 4
WeC.y f y Weff.y f y
[5.4.5.2( l)] My.Sd 5 Mcy.Rd = Mpf.y.Rd = WPf.Y f Y = .y.Rd = = Meff.y.Rd =
YMO YMO yM1
Wpf.2 f y WeC.2 f y - Weff.z fy

Mz.Sd 5 MczRd = MpC.z.Rd = = Mef.z.Rd = = Meff.z.Rd -
YMO YMO YMI
where Mc.Rd is the design moment resistance of the cross-section, '
Mcy.Rd, Mczxd are the design moment resistances of the cross-section about
major (yy) and minor (zz) axes,
MpLy.Rd, MpLz.Rd are the design plastic moment resistances of the cross-section
about y and z axes,
MeLyRd, MeLz.Rd are the design elastic moment resistances of the cross-section
about y and z axes,
Meff.y.Rd, Meff.z.Rd are the design effective moment resistances of the cross-
section about y and z axes,
WpLy, WpLz are the plastic section modulus about y and z axes,
WeLy, WeLz are the elastic section modulus about y and z axes,
Weff.y,Weff.z are the effective section modulus about y and z axes (see
chapter V) ,
YMO, YMI are partial safety factors (see table 1.2).
Ref. 4 (2) In the presence of holes for fastener the following simple approach is proposed :
5.3.2(3) - no deduction of holes in the compression zone and,
- deduction of holes in tension zone.
Otherwise Eurocode 3 should be consulted in 15.4531.
141
m.e.2 Stability of member to Mysd

[5.5.2]
[5.5.2( 8)] (1) A beam with full restraint to the compression flange does not need to be checked for
lateral-torsional buckling.
(2) I and H-sections, channels, angles, T-sections and rectangular hollow sections are
susceptible to lateral-torsional buckling in respect of bending about their major axis
(MY.sd)but not about their minor axis (MZsd).
[55.2(7)1 (3) For members with appropriate non-dimensional slenderness 104,0-1 no allowance for
lateral-torsional buckling is necessary. The value of ~ L isT defined hereafter.
(4) For laterally unrestrained members in bending, the design value for the bending moment
about major axis (My.Sd) shall satisfy :
I MbRd depending on classes of cross-section :

~~
I
class 1 or 2 class 3 class 4
[form. (5.48)] - XLT Wpc.y fy - XLT We[.y f y - XLT WeH.y fy

My.Sd 5 MbRd
YMl YMl YMl
(5) The value of XLT for the appropriate non-dimensional slenderness ~ L may
T be determined
from :
CXLT is the imperfection factor for lateral-torsional buckling;

CCLTshould be taken as :
- for rolled section (XLT= 0,21 (buckling curve a in table VD.2)
- for welded section CCLT= 0,49 (buckling curve c in table VII.2).
The reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling XLT is given in function of ~ L and
T the
type of section in table VIII.10.
142
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending
(6) The non-dimensional slenderness ZLT may be determined from :

-
XLT depending on the classes of cross-section
h
class 1 or 2 I class 3 class 4
[5.5.2(5)]
~~ ~
where W p ~ y , WeffOy are respectively the plastic, elastic and effective section
modulus about major axis (yy),
Mcr is the elastic critical moment of the gross cross-section for
lateral-torsional buckling.
(7) The elastic critical moment M c r for doubly symmetrical cross-sections with in plane end
moment loading may be taken as
[Annex F]
[form. (FS)]
where C1 is a factor which may be taken from table VIII.12 using also table
VIII. 1 1,
E is the modulus of elasticity,
1, is the second moment of area about minor axis (zz),
( L T = k L is the effective length for out-of-plane (xz) bending (see table VIII.1l),
L is the length of the member between points which have lateral restraint,
k is the effective length factor for out-of-plane (xz) bending (see table
VIII.1 l),
is the effective length factor for warping (see table VIII. 1 l),
is the warping constant,
is the torsion constant.
(8) In a member with a system length L, each portion I , between adjacent points with lateral
restraint, or from one end to the nearest point with lateral restraint, can be checked
separately (see table VIII.12).
(9) For other types of cross-section and for other loading conditions on the member, the
Annex F of Eurocode 3 should be consulted.
143
Ref. 4
table 5.25
L T rolled sections (curve a) welded sections (curve c)

0,9528 0,8973
0,9243 0,8430
0,8900 0,7854
0,8477 0,7247
0,7957 0,6622
0,7339 0,5998
0,6656 0,5399
0,5960 0,4842
0,5300 0,4338
0,4703 0,3888
0,4179 0,3492
0,3724 0,3145
0,3332 0,2842
0,2994 0,2577
0,2702 0,2345
0,2449 0,2141
0,2229 0,1962
0,2036 0,1803
0,1867 0,1663
0,1717 0,1537
0,1585 0,1425
0,1467 0,1325
0,1362 0,1234
0,1267 0,1153
0,1182 0,1079
0,1105 0,1012
0.1036 0.095 1
-
Ref. 4
Table VIII.ll Effective length factors : k, k,
table 5.23
for different out-of-plane (xz) for different warping

bending end conditions end conditions
k = 1,0 k,= 1,0
144
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending
145
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIIl Members in bending I
Vm.f Verification at ULS to biaxial bending moment (M,.sd, Mzsd)
vm.f.1 Resistance of cross-section to (My.sd, Mz.Sd)
(1) For members submitted to biaxial bending moments, the design values of both bending
moments shall satisfy in each cross-section :
where the interaction formula is given :

in IX.d.1.2 (2) for class 1 or 2 cross-sections,
in IX.d.1.3 (1) (using Nx.sd= 0) for class 3 cross-sections and,
in IX.d. 1.4 (1) (using Nx.Sd = 0) for class 4 cross-sections.
VIII.f.2 Stability of member to (My.%,&.sa)
(1) For members submitted to biaxial bending moments the design values of both bending
moments shall satisfy :
interaction (My.Sd,MzaSd)I
where the interaction formula is given :
in IX.d.2.2( 1) (table K.4) (using Nx.Sd = 0) for class 1 or 2 cross-sections,
in IX.d.2.2 (1) (table K.5) (using Nx.Sd = 0) for class 3 cross-sections and,
in IX.d.2.2 (1) (table IX.6) (using Nx.Sd = 0) for class 4 cross-sections.
(2) If the appropriate non-dimensional slenderness I~LT> 0,401 (see chapterVIII.e.2) then
lateral-torsional buckling is a potential failure mode and a supplementary check has to be
taken into account as follows :
where the interaction formula is given in :

in IX.d.2.2 (1) (table JX.4) (using Nx.Sd =o) for class 1 and 2 cross-sections,
in IX.d.2.2 (1) (table R.5) (using Nx.Sd =O) for class 3 cross-sections,
in IX.d.2.2( 1) (table IX.7) (using Nx.Sd =o) for class 4 cross-sections.
VIII.g Verifications at ULS to combined (VSQ MSd)

VIII.g.1 Resistance of cross-section to (VSd, MSd)
[5.4.7(2)] (1) If the design value of the shear force
where Vp(zRd,VpLyRd are the design plastic shear resistance about minor (zz) and
major (yy) axes (see table VIII.13),
no reduction needs to be made in the resistance moments. With this condition the design
value of bending moment MSd shall be verified according to chapter VII1.e or chapter
VII1.f respectively in case of uniaxial bending or biaxial bending.
146
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending 1
VIn.g.l.1 Shear force VSd and uniaxial bending Md
I
I [5.4.7(3)] (1) For the resistance of cross-section submitted to combined shear force (Vz.Sd or Vy.Sd ) and
I
uniaxial bending moment (My.Sd or Mz.Sd) if the design value of shear force
1- (high shear),
then interaction between shear force and bending moment shall be considered. In this case
the design value of bending moment MSd shall satisfy at each cross-section :
[form. (5.22)]
where MV.Rd is the reduced design plastic resistance moment allowing for the shear
force (see table VIII.13),
Mcxd is the design plastic moment resistance of the cross-section (see chapter
V1II.e. 1).
Applied bending moment If high shear: VSd > 0,5 VpLRd
UySd ,for cross-section with equal flanges:
UySd, for cross-section with unequal flanges:
Mz.Sd, for any cross-section:
I wpf2,
=
YMO
for class 1 or 2 cross - sections
where
but MV.Rd
Wpr
Mc.Rd
I
= wef
=We@-
-, for class 3 cross- section
f~
YMO
f~
YMl
, for class 4 cross - section
is the plastic section modulus of cross-section
. - -
for shear areas (Avvz,A,,), see table VIII.5
tw is the web thickness
fY is the yield strength (see table 11.4)
YMO is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2).
147
I Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - VIII Members in bending 1
Vm.g.1.2 Shear force VSd and biaxial bending moment MSd
(1) For the resistance of cross-section submitted to combined shear forces (Vz.Sd and Vy.sd)
and biaxial bending moments (My.Sd and Mz.Sd), if the design value of the shear forces
it is proposed that following interactions between shear forces and bending moments shall
be satisfied at each cross-section according to the class of cross-section.
(2) For class 1 or 2 cross-sections ,the proposed interaction formula is :

Ref. 4
table 5.15
I[ MY.Sd
MV.y.Rd
]’.[ ]”Mz.Sd
MV.z.Rd
5 1 I
where MVeyXdand MVez.Rd are the reduced design plastic resistance moments allowing
for shear forces (see table VIXI.13),
a and p are constants, taken as follows :
- for I and H sections : a=2,p=1
- for circular tubes : a=2,p=2
- for rectangular hollow sections : a = p = 1,66
- for solid rectangles and plates : a = p = 1,73
(3) For class 3 and class 4 cross-sections, the proposed interaction formula is :
where MV.yXd and Mv.z.Rd are the reduced design plastic resistance moments allowing
for shear forces (see table VIII.13),
VIII.g.2 Stability of web to (Vz.Sd, Mysd)
a
(1) If webs are submitted to combined shear force VzSd and bending moment My.Sd and if
they have ratio - exceeding the limits given in table VIII.7 then they shall be checked
for resistance to shear buckling.
(2) The interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance is shown in table
VIXI.14 according to the simple post-critical method.
148
[Ref. EC 3 for non-swaybuildings - VIII Members in bending 1
Table VIII.14 Interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance with the
simple post-critical method
M
b
Mf.Rd Mpl.Rd
(3) The web may be assumed to be satisfactory if one of the three following checks
(A, B or C) (according to the loading level of Vt.Sd and My.Sd) shall be satisfied :
A) If the design value of bending moment
IMv.Sd 'Mf.Rdl 3
where MfJd is the design plastic moment resistance of a cross-section consisting of the
flanges only; proposal for cross-section with equal flanges :
I
class 1,2 or 3 I
I
class 4
I
where b, tf, h are flange width, flange thickness, height of profile (see
table 0. l),
b,fi is the effective width of the compression flange (see
chapter V),
eM is the shift of the centroidal major axis b y ) when the
cross-section consisting of flanges only is subject to
My.Sd-
then the design value of shear force shall satisfy:
where Vba.Rd is the design shear resistance buckling of the web according to simple
post-critical method (see chapter VIII.d.2).
149
B) If the design values of bending moment and shear force
then the bending moment shall satisfy :
where Mcyxd is the design moment resistance of the cross-section depending on classes
of cross-sections (see chapter VII1.e. 1).
C) If the design values of bending moment and shear force
then the bending moment and the shear force shall satisfy the three following checks:
-
I
My.Sd Mf.Rd -t (Mpf.y.Rd -Mf.Rd)l I-( Vz.Sd
Vba.Rd
-l)
2
1
where MpLy.Rd is the design plastic moment resistance of the cross-section :
150
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildinwIX Members with combined axial force and bendinn moment I
IX MEMBERS WITH COMBINED AXIAL FORCE

AND BENDING MOMENT ((N, M);(N, V, M))
151
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment 1
IX MEMBERS WITH COMBINED AXIAL FORCE AND BENDING

MOMENT ((N, M);(N, V, M))
1X.a Generalities
(1) For each load case (see chapter 111) the globa analysis of the frame (see chapter IV)
determines the design values for the following effects of actions which are applied to
members with combined axial force and bending moment and which shall be checked at
serviceability limit states and at ultimate limit states:
- ForSLS: .vertical deflections (&),
. vibrations (f)
- ForULS: different combinations of axial forces, shear forces and bending
moments :
2
Mz.Sd
(2) The table IX.1 provides a list of the checks to be performed at Ultimate Limit States for
the member submitted to combined axial force and bending moment (N, M). A member
shall have sufficient bearing capacity if all the checks are fulfilled according to the loading
applied to that member. For instance, in the case of loading nr 0, all checks from @(1) to
O(5)have to be satisfied. Several checks in the table IX.1 concern particular cases with
specific conditions.Al1 the checks have both references to Eurocode 3 and to the design
handbook.
The table IX. 1 proposes the following loadings applied to the member:
@ Axial tensile force and uniaxial bending moment about maior axis ( N x . S d , My.sd)
@ Axial tensile force and uniaxid bending moment about minor axis ( N x . S d , M z . s d )
@ Axial compressive force and uniaxial bendinn moment about maior axis ( N x . s d ,My.Sd)
@ Axial compressive force and uniaxial bending moment about minor axis ( N x . s d , M z S d )
@ Axial tensile force and biaxial bending moments ( N x . s d , M y . s d , Mz.sd)
@ Axial compressive force and biaxial bending moments ( N x . S d , My.sd, Mzsd )
Previous page
is blank
153
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment I
Table IX.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member submitted to
combined axial force and bending moment (N, M)
Axial tensile force and uniaxial bending moment about major axis References :
(Nx.Sd f l y . S d ) :
Resistance of gross cross-section to Nx.Sd :
p.4.3 (l)] Nx.Sd 2 NpLRd (design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section) VI.b.1 (1)
Resistance of the net cross-section to Nx.Sd if holes for fasteners:

[5.4.3 (111
Nx.Sd 5 Nu.Rd (design resistance of the net cross-section considering the net area VI.b.2 (1)
[5.4.2.2] of a member or element cross-section, bet)
Resistance of cross-section to Nx.Sd if angle connected by one leg: VI.c.1 (1)

see table VI.l : checks @(3) and @(4) VI.c.2 (1)
Resistance of cross-section to (Nx.Sd ,My.sd):

[5.4.8.1] interaction (Nx.Sd , My.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-sections IX.d.l.1 (1)
[5.4.8.2] for class 3 cross-section IX.d.1.3 (2)
[5.5.2 (7)] (5) Out-of-plane (xy) stability of member to (Nx.Sd , My.sd) if XLT 7 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
[5.5.3] Meff.Sd 5 Mb.Rd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member) VIII.e.2 (4)
[5.5.3 (3)]
[5.5.3 (4)] with Meff.Sd calculated with (Nx.Sd , My.Sd) IX.d.2.1 (1)
@ Axial tensile force and uniaxial bending moment about minor axis
(Nx.Sd f l z S d ) :
[5.4.3 (I)] (1) Resistance of gross cross-section to Nxsd :
Nx.Sd 2 NpLRd (design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section) VI.b.1 (1)
(2) Resistance of the net cross-section to Nxsd if holes for fasteners:
[5.4.3 (l)]
Nx.Sd 5 NuRd (design resistance of the net cross-section considering the net area
[5.4.2.2] of a member or element cross-section, bet)
VI.b.2 (1)
(3) Resistance of cross-section to Nx.sd if angle connected by one leg: VI.c.1 (1)
see table VI.l : checks @(3) and @(4) VI.c.2 (1)
(4) Resistance of cross-section to (Nx.sd, &d):
p.4.8.I]
interaction (Nx.Sd , Mz.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-sections IX.d.l.l (1)
[5.4.8.2] for class 3 cross-section K d . 1.3 (2)
[5.4.8.3] for class 4 cross-section IX.d. 1.4 (2)
154
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment
~~~ ~
Table M.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member submitted to
0 Axial compressive force and uniaxial bending moment about major axis References :
(Nx.Sd f l y . S d ) ;
(1) Resistance of cross-sectionto Nx.Sd:
p4.3 (l)] Nx.Sd 5 NpLRd (design plastic resistance of the cross-section) VII.c.1 (1)
(2) In-plane (xz) stability of member to Nxsd:
[5.5.1.1 (l)] Nx.Sd I Nby.Rd (design flexural buckling resistance of member) VII.c.2.1 (2)
(3) Out-of-plane(xy) stability of member to Nx.sd:
[5.5.1.1 (l)] Nx.Sd I Nbz.Rd (design flexural buckling resistance of member) VII.c.2.1 (2)
(4) General stability of member to Nx.sd :
[Annex G] Nx.Sd Idesign torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
[Annex G] and, Nx.Sd I design flexural-torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
Resistance of cross-sectionand stability of member to Nx.sd i f class 4 VII.d.l (1)
monosymmetrical cross-section: VII.d.2 (1)
see table VII. 1 : from checks @(3) to @(5) VII.d.2 (2)
Resistance of cross-sectionand stability of member to Nx.sd i f angle VI1.e. 1.1 (1)
connected by one leg: VII.e.l.2 (1)
VII.e.2.1 (1)
see table VII.l : from checks @(6) to @(9) VII.e.2.2 (1)
[5.5.2(7)] Out-ofplane (xy) stability of member to Mysd i f Z L T > 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
[5.5.2 (l)] MySd 5 Mb.Rd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the VIII.e.2 (4)
member)
Resistance of cross-sectionto (Nx.sd ,My.sd):
[5.4.8.1] interaction (Nx.Sd, My.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-sections IX.d.l.1 (1)
[5.4.8.21 for class 3 cross-section IX.d.1.3 (2)
In-plane (xz) stability of member to (Nx.sd, Mysd): X.d.2.2(3)
155.4 (1>1 interaction ( N x . S d , My.Sd) I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-sections table IX.4
[5.5.2 (7)] Out-of-plane(xy)stability of member to (Nxsd, Mysd )f I L T > 0,40 IX.d.2.2 (2)
(potential lateral-torsional buckling): VIII.e.2 (3)
p 5 . 4 (2)] interaction (Nx.Sd, My.sd)I 1 , for class 1 and 2 cross-sections table IX.4
[5.5.4(6)] for class 4 cross-section table IX.7
155
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment I
Table M.1 List of checks to be Derformed at ULS for the member submitted to
combined axial force ahd bending moment (N, M)
Axial compressive force and uniaxial bending moment about minor axis References :
(Nx.Sd f l z S d )
Resistance of cross-sectionto Nx.sd:

[5.4.3 (l)] Nx.Sd 5 NpfXd (design plastic resistance of the cross-section) vII.c.1 (1)
In-plane (xy)stability of member to Nxsd:
[5.5.1.1 (l)] Nx.Sd INbz.Rd (design flexural buckling resistance of member) vII.c.2.1 (2)
Out-of-plane(xz) stability of member to Nx,sd:
[5.5.1.1 (l)] Nx.Sd 5 Nby.Rd (design flexural buckling resistance of member) VII.c.2.1 (2)
General stability of member to Nx.sd :
[Annex G] Nx.Sd Idesign torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
[Annex G] and, Nx.Sd Idesign flexural-torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
(5) Resistance of cross-sectionand stability of member to Nx.Sd if class 4 VII.d.1 (1)

monosymmetrical cross-section : VII.d.2 (1)
see table VII.1 : from checks @(3) to @(5) VII.d.2 (2)
(6) Resistance of cross-section and stability of member to Nx.Sd if angle VI1.e. 1.1 (1)
connected by one leg: VI1.e. 1.2 (1)
VII.e.2.1 (1)
(7) Resistance of cross-sectionto ( N x S d , Mz,sd):

[5.4.8.1] interaction (Nx.Sd, Mz.Sd) 5 1, for class 1 and 2 cross-sections IX.d.l.l (1)
[5.4.8.3] for class 4 cross-section K d . 1.4 (2)
(8) In-plane (xy) stability of member to ( N x S d , MzSd): X.d.2.2 (3)

p.5.4 (l)] interaction (Nx.Sd, Mz.Sd) 51, for class 1 and 2 cross-sections able IX.4
[5.5.4 (3)] for class 3 cross-section able IX.5
[5.5.4 (5)] for class 4 cross-section able IX.6
156
~~~
Table M.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member submitted to
@ Axial tensile force and biaxial bending moments (Nx.sdyMy.sdyMzsd ) References :
Resistance of gross cross-section to Nx.sd :
[5.4.3 (l)] Nx.Sd 5 Np[Rd (design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section) VI.b.1 (1)
Resistance of the net cross-section to Nxsd if holes for fasteners:
p 4 . 3 (l)]
Nx.Sd 5 NuRd (design resistance of the net cross-section considering the net are2 VI.b.2 (1)
[5.4.2.2]
of a member or element cross-section,A,)
Resistance of cross-sectionto Nx.sd if angle connected by one leg:

VI.c.1 (1)
see table VI. 1 : checks a(3)
and @(4) VI.c.2 (1)
I5.5.2 (7)] Out-of-plane(xy) stability of member to (Nx.Sd ,Mysd ) if Z L T > 0,40 :
VIII.e.2 (3)
[55.3] Meff.Sd Mbxd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member VIII.e.2 (4)
[5.5.3 (311
[5.5.3 (4)] With Meff.Sd cdculated With (Nx.Sd ,My.Sd) IX.d.2.1 (1)
Resistance of cross-section to (Nx.sd ,My.sd, M z s d ): IX.d. 1
[5.4.8.1] interaction (Nx.Sd, My.Sd, Mz.Sd ) I1 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections IX.d. 1.2 (1)
Stability of member to (Nx.sd, Mysd, Mzsd ): VIII.f.2 (1)
p 5 . 4 (I)] interaction (My.Sd, Mz.Sd)) 5 1 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections table IX.4

[5.5.4 (S)] for class 4 cross-section table IX.6
[5.5.2 (7)] Stability of member to (Nx.sd, My&, Mzsd ) if ILT> 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
(potential lateral-torsionalbuckling VIII.f.2 (2)
p 5 . 4 (2)] interaction (My.Sd, Mz.sd)) I1 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections table IX.4
with My.Sd reduced to Meff.Sd ( as in check @(5)) IX.d.2.1 (1)
157
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment I
I'ableIX.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member submitted to

@ Axial compressive force and biaxial bending moments References :
(Nx.Sd, My.Sd, MzSd ):
(1) Resistance of cross-section to Nxsd :
p.4.3 (l)] Nx.Sd 5 NpLRd (design plastic resistance of the cross-section) VII.c.1 (1)
(2) Stability of member to NxSd:
[5.5. 1.11 Nx.Sd Iminimum (Nbyxd, Nbz.Rd) (design flexurd buckling resistances of VII.c.2.1 (2)
member)
[Annex G] and, Nx.Sd 5 design torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
[Annex G] and, Nx.Sd Idesign flexural-torsional buckling resistance of member VII.c.2.2
(3) Resistance of cross-sectionand stability of member to Nx.Sd if class 4 VII.d.1 (1)
monosymmetrical cross-section: VII.d.2 (1)
see table VII.1 : from checks @(3) to @(5) VII.d.2 (2)
(4) Resistance of cross-sectionand stability of member to Nx.Sd if angle VII.e.l.l (1)
connected by one leg: VI1.e. 1.2 (1)
VII.e.2.1 (1)
[5.5.2 (7)] (5) Stability of member to Mysd if ZLT > 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
[5.5.2 (l)] My.Sd 5 Mb.Rd (design lateral-torsional buckling resistance moment of the member) VIII.e.2 (4)
(6) Resistance of cross-section to (Nx.sd,My.sd, Mz.sd ):
[5.4.8.11 interaction (Nx.Sd ,My.Sd, Mz.Sd)) I1 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections IXd. 1.2 (1)
(7) Stability of member to (Nx.Sd,kfy.Sd, MZ.sd ): Ix.d.2.2 (1)
p.5.4 (l)] interaction (Nx.Sd , My.Sd, Mz.Sd)) I 1 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections table IX.4
[5.5.4 (311 for class 3 cross-section table IX.5
[5.5.2 (711 (8) Stability of member to (Nx.sd, My.sd, Mz.Sd ) if Z L T > 0,40 : VIII.e.2 (3)
(potential lateral-torsional buckling) IX.d.2.2 (2)
p.5.4 (2)] interaction (Nx.Sd, My.Sd, Mz.Sd)) I1 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections table IX.4
[5.5 A (4)] for class 3 cross-section table IX.5
[5.5.4 (6)J for class 4 cross-section table IX.7
158
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment
1X.b Verifications at SLS
IX.b.1 Deflections
(1) About recommended limiting values for vertical deflections reference may be made to
chapter VII1.b. 1.
IX.b.2 Vi brations
(1) About recommended limiting values for floor vibrations reference may be made to chapter
VIII.b.2.
1x.c Classification of cross-section
(1) At ultimate limit states the resistance of cross-sections may be limited by its local buckling
(2) For cross-sections submitted to combined axial load (N,.sd) and bending moments (My.Sd,
M,.Sd) the classification may specifically be determined according to the procedure
defined in chapter V.d.3.
1X.d Verifications at ULS to (N,M)
(1) The verification of members submitted to combined axial force and bending moments
shall be performed with different (N, M) interaction rules about:
1) the resistance of the cross-section (see chapter IX.d.l),
2) the buckling of member (see chapter IX.d.2) and,
3) the lateral-torsional buckling of the member (if potential)(see chapter IX.d.2)
This principle of (N, M) interaction formulas is illustrated in table IX.2 in case of uniaxial
bending and compression (on the basis of the interpretation of Eurocode 3 explained in the
comment IX.d.2.2 (3)).
(2) All the (N, M) interaction formulas depend on the class of cross-sections.
(3) hiaxial bending (My.Sd or M,.sd) and biaxial bending (My.Sd and M,.Sd) combined with
axial force Nx.Sd are presented in the following chapters.
IX.d.1 Resistance of cross-section to (Nsd, MSd)
IX.d.l.1 Uniaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-sections
[5.4.8.1(1)] (1) For the plastic resistance of class 1 or 2 cross-sections submitted to combined axial load
(Nx.Sd) and uniaxial bending moment (My.Sd or M,.Sd) , the following criterion shall be
satisfied if the level of axial load n is high:
[form. (5.23)] 1-
where MN.Rd is the reduced design plastic resistance moment allowing for the axial
force (MNy.Rd, MNz.Rd) (see table m-31,
n is the level of axial load (see table IX.3)
where NpLRd is the design plastic resistance of the cross-section

[5.4.8.1(3)1 (2) If the level of axial load ns is low (see table IX.3, for the limiting values of n), then the
reduction of the theoritical plastic resistance moment by the presence of small axial forces
is counter-balanced by the strain hardening and may be neglected. In that case of low ns
reference may be made to chapter VIII.e.1 for checking single MSd .
159
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment
Fable E.2 Principle of interaction formulas between axial force NSd and bending moment Ms,
1. For bending moment about major axis My.Sd without lateral-torsional buckling ( ZLTI 0,4):
Z
N
Instabilitv
Nx.Sd
/ 1 ,lack of resistance
M cy.Rd
l. For bending moment about major axis My.Sd with lateral-torsional buckling( ZLT> 0,4):
N
Nc.Rd
Nx.Sd
-4-
===> *
My.Sd
I
Z
Mb.Rd Mcy.Rd
-
!. For bending moment about minor axis Mz.Sd :
N Z
Mz.Sd
I
Nx.Sd
+
i
lack of resistance
160
LRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bendinn moment 1
rable M.3 Reduced design plastic resistance moment M N a d dowing for axial load
for class 1 or 2 cross-sections
[5.4.8.1 (4)]
Rolled and welded If high level of axial load Nx.Sd :
Values of the limit a
I-sections if f i l
-
Y
(
a = min 0,25; f
1-n
MNy.Rd = (-)wp[.y
A -2A
2btf) 1-a YMO
y&-y
a = min 0,50;
( A - 2Ab t f )
If high level of axial load Nx.Sd :

Hollow sections Values of the limit a
if L ZGII
I "
-6- I a = 0,25
Y- 8- -Y
A-2bt
a=
A
For a plate
withoutbolt holes
--Nx.Sd
-
Votes : ns -
A fY
- Limitation of MN.Rd obtained from this table:

MN.Rd I M pLRd (design plastic resistance moment)
- WP[.Y f Y
MNy.Rd MpC.y.Rd -
YMO
in other words,
Wpc.2 f y
MNz.Rd MpC.z.Rd = YMO
161
M.d.1.2 Biaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-sections
[5.4.8.1(11)] (1) For the plastic resistance of class 1 or 2 cross-sections submitted to combined axial load
(Nx.sd) and biaxial bending moments (My.Sd and Mz.Sd) the following criterion may be
used :
[form. (5.35)]
where MNy:Rdand MNz.Rd are reduced design plastic resistance moments allowing for
axial load (see table IX.3)
a and p are constants taken as follows:
- for I and H sections: a=2 ;p=5n,butp21
- for circular tubes: a=2 ;p=2
1,66
- for rectangular hollow sections: a = p = ,,buta=p I 6
1- 1,13n
- for solid rectangles and plates: a = p = 1,73 + 1,s n3
(2) In case of biaxial bending moments without axial load it is proposed to use the following
where W p ~ y , W p ~ zare plastic section modulus about major axis (yy) and minor axis
(ZZ),
fY is the yield strength (see table II.4)

YMO is a partial safety factor (see table 1.2) ,
a and p are constants taken as follows:
- for I and H sections: a=2 ;p=1
- for circular tubes: a = 2 ;p=2
- for rectangular hollow sections: a =k1,66
- for solid rectangles and plates: a = p = 1,73
M.d.1.3 Bending of class 3 cross-sections
[5.4.8.2] (1) For the elastic resistance of class 3 cross-sections submitted to combined axial load
(Nx.Sd) and biaxial bending moments (My.Sd and Mz.Sd) the following criterion shall be
satisfied:
I I
[form. (5.38:
(2) In case of uniaxial bending moment combined with axial load ((Nx.Sd + My.sd) or (Nx.sd +
M,.sd)) and in case of biaxial bending moments without axial load (My.Sd + Mz.s& it is
proposed to use the above criterion (IX.d. 1.3 (1)).
162
IX.d.l.4 Bending of class 4 cross-sections

p.4.8.31 (1) For the elastic resistance of class 4 cross-sections submitted to combined axial load
(Nx.Sd) and biaxial bending moments (My.Sd and Mz.Sd) the following criterion shall be
satisfied:
Nx.Sd + MY-Sd Nx-Sd eNY + Mz.Sd 4- Nx.Sd eNz -1

[form. (5.40)]
fY fY fY
*e, - Weff.y - Weff.z -
YMl YM1 YMI
where Aeff is the effective area of the cross-section when subject to uniform
compression (single Nx.sd).
Weff is the effective section modulus of the cross-section when subject only to
moment about the relevant axis(sing1e My.Sd , single Mz.sd) .
eN is the shift of the relevant centroidal axis (eNy, eNz) when the cross-section
is subject to uniform compression (single Nx.sd) .
(2) In case of uniaxial bending moment combined with axial load ((Nx.Sd + My.Sd) or
(Nx.Sd + M,.sd)) and in case of biaxial bending moments without axial load (My.Sd +
Mz.Sd), it is proposed to use the above criterion ( K d . 1.4 (1)).
IX.d.2 Stability of member to (NSd,MSd)
IX.d.2.1 Stability of member to (Ntemion, My.Sd)

[5.5.31
(1) If the non-dimensional slenderness of the member l h >~ ~ (see chapter VIII.e.2), the
0,401
member subject to combined major axis bending (My.sd) and axial tension (Nx.sd)shall be
checked for resistance to lateral-torsional buckling as follows (if bending moment and
axial force can vary independently (vectorial effect)):
where M b R d is the design buckling resistance moment (see chapter VIII.e.2)

MeffSd is the effective design internal moment obtained from:
where Wcom is the elastic section modulus for the extreme

compression fibre,
Dc0m.m is the net calculated stress (which can exceed fy) in the
extreme compression fibre determined from:
where vvec is the reduction factor for vectorial

effects
163
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment 1
M.d.2.2 Stability of member to (Ncompreaion, MSd)

[5.5.4]
(1) For members subject to combined axial compression and biaxial bending moments (Nx.Sd
+ My.Sd + Mz.sd) the stability is guaranteed if the requirements (concerning the case 0)
described in tables IX.4 to IX.7 are satisfied:
- in table IX.4 for class 1 or 2 cross-sections,
- in table IX.5 for class 3 cross-sections and,
- in tables IX.6 and IX.7 for class 4 cross-sections.
(2) As given in the tables IX.4 to IX.7, when the non-dimensional slenderness of the member
> 0,401 (see
(~LT chapter VIII.e.2), supplementary specific formulas also need to be satisfied
to take into account the potential failure mode of lateral-torsional buckling of the member.
(3) The cases of uniaxial bending moment combined with axial compression ((Nx.Sd + My.sd)
or (Nx.Sd + Mz.sd)) are not fully explained in Eurocode 3. Therefore it is proposed to use
the rules for biaxial bending with the buckling reduction factor Xmin Q m i n = minimum Qy,
xz); where ky,xz) are the buckling reduction factors about y axis and z axis) (see rules
concerning the case @ in tables IX.4 to D(.7).This principle of (N, M) interaction
formulas is illustrated in table IX.2.
'
(4)According to Eurocode 3 Background Document 5.03 (/so, another interpretation could be
proposed for uniaxial bending combined with axial compression: this proposal may be less
conservative because the factor Xmin is replaced by the buckling reduction factors xy or xz
according to the relevant bending axis. Moreover the stability out of the bending plane
should be also checked (buckling resistance of the member to single axial compression)
(see rules concerning the case 0in tables IX.4 to IX.7).
164
Table M.4 Interaction formulas for the (N,M) stability check of members of class I or 2
Internal General formulas to be always satisfied: If XLT > 0,4:
forces potential lateral-torsional buckling
and needs supplementary checks:
moments
Nx.Sd Nx.Sd ' + kYMYsd + kzM.z.Sd 51 Nx.Sd + kLTMy.Sd + kzMz.Sd 51

+ MySd f Y f Y f Y f Y f Y f Y
Xmin A- WpLy - WpLz - X2A- XLTWpLy - WpLz -
Mz.Sd YM1 YMl YMl YMl YM1 YMl
NxSd Nx.Sd + kyMy.Sd Nx.Sd + kLTMy.Sd

51 51
fY f Y
-+ My.Sd Xy A- WpLy - XZA- fY xLTWpC.y- fY
YM1 YM1 YMl YMl

c
LY
and, Nx.Sd Nb.z.Rd = XzA-
YMl
Nx.Sd Nx.Sd + kzMz.Sd 51

f Y fY
-F Mz.Sd X Z A- WpC.2 -
YMl YM1
'Y
and, Nx.Sd Nb.y.Rd = Xy A-
YMl
where: Xmin = minimum ( xy; xZ), where xY
-
and xZare given in chapter VII.c.2.1
hLT and XLT are given in chapter VIII.e.2
k y = l - pyNx.Sd but ky 5 1,5 ; where py =%y(2PMy -'I)+[
XY AfY
Wp[.y - W e ~ . y
Wd.y
] but py 50,90,
where PM ( P M ~ , PM~)is the equivalent uniform moment factor related to the shape of the bending
moment (My.Sd, Mz.Sd):
M m WM
165
Table M.5 Interaction formulas for the (N,M) stability check of members of class 3
I I
Internal If ?CLT > 0,4:

forces General formulas to be always satisfied:
and potential lateral-torsional buckling
moments needs supplementary checks:
@ Eurocode 3 formulas for biaxial bending (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) and axial compression Nx.Sd:
NxSd Nx.Sd + kYMY.sd + kzMz.Sd 11 Nx.Sd + kLTMy.Sd
+ kzMz.Sd 11
+My.Sd fY f Y fY
xminA- f Y Wet.y - Wet.z - X Z A- Y
f XLTWeC.y- Y f WeC.z -
+ Mz.Sd YMl Y M1
YMl YMl Y M1 YMl
@ Eurocode 3 formulas for uniaxial bending and axial compression:
use the formula for biaxial bending and axial compression (see 0) introducing the
relevant bending moment equal to zero and using Xmin buckling reduction factor.
@) Other proposal of interpretation of Eurocode 3 formulas for uniaxial bending and axial
compression (see comments in IX.d.2.2) using buckling reduction factors xy or xZ according to
the relevant bending axis:
Nx.Sd Nx.Sd + kYMYsd I1 Nx.Sd + kLTMy.Sd I1
f Y f Y f Y Y
+ My.Sd Xy A- Wel.y - XZ A- XLT eC.y
f
-
YMl YMI YMl YMl
I
1
and, Y
Nx.Sd I Nb.z.Rd = XzA-
YM1
Nx.Sd Nx.Sd + kzMz.Sd 11
f Y fY
-tMz.Sd XZ A-- WeLz -
YMl YM1
c
Nx.Sd Nb.y.Rd = XyA*
yM1
where: Xmin = minimum ( xY; xZ), where xY
- and xZare given in chapter VII.c.2.1
~ L and
T XLT are given in chapter VIII.e.2
where PM ( P M ~6, ~ is~ the) equivalent uniform moment factor related to the shape of the
bendingmoment (My.Sd, Mz.Sd):
M m WM
166
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment 1
Table IX.6 General interaction formulas for the (N,M) stability check of members of class 4
I
Internal General formulas to be always satisfied:

forces and moments
0Eurocode 3 formulas for biaxial bending (M,.Sd, Mz.Sd) and axial compression Nx.Sd:
Nx.Sd + Nx.Sd + kY + Nx.Sd 'NY) + kz(Mz.Sd 4- Nx.Sd eNz) I1
My.Sd + Mz.Sd f Y f Y f Y
Xmin Aeff- WeE.y- Weff.2 -
YM1 YM1 YMl
@ Eurocode 3 formulas for uniaxial bending and axial compression:
@ Other proposal of interpretation of Eurocode 3 formulas for uniaxial bending and axial
compression (see comments in IX.d.2.2) using buckling reduction factors or according to xy xz
the relevant bending axis:
Nx.Sd + My.Sd Nx.Sd r + ky(My.Sd + Nx.Sd eNy) I1
and, Nx.Sd I Nb.z.Rd = XzAeff- fY

YMl
Nx.Sd + Mz.Sd
f Y
and, Nx.Sd I Nb.y.Rd = x y -
YMl
where: Xmin = minimum ( xy; xz ), where xy and xz are given in chapter VII.c.2.1
-
~ L and
T XLT are given in chapter VIII.e.2
-
ky=l- p y Nx.Sd but ky I1,5 ;where py = h y ( 2 P M y -4) but py 10,90,
x y Aeff f y
k z = l - pz Nx*Sd but k, I1,5 ; where p, = %,(2p, - 4)but p, <&go,

Xz Aeff f y
where PM ( P M ~~, M Z > is the equivalent uniform moment factor related to the shape of the bending
moment (MSd + Nx.Sd eN):
M rn
PM= 1,8 - 0,7 w
-1IyfI1
WM TuP pM = 173
\vvy
pM = 1 7 4
where Aeff, WeffeY,Weff.z, eN.y,eN.zare effective properties of cross-section defined in chapter V.
167 I
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment I
1 Table IX.7 Supplementary interaction formulas for the (N,M) stabiZifycheck of members of class 4
Internal If ~ L >T 0,4:potential lateral-torsional buckling needs supplementary checks
forces and moments
1 @ Eurocode 3 formulas for biaxial bending (My.Sd, Mz.Sd) and axial compression Nx.Sd:
Nx.Sd + Nx.Sd + kLT(MYsd 4- NX.sdeNY) + kz(Mz.Sd Nx.Sd eNz) I

My.Sd -k Mz.Sd ~ m i Aeff
n -
fY
XLTWeff.y -
f Y
Weff.2 -
f,
YM1 YMl YMl
1 @ Eurocode 3 formulas for uniaxial bending and axial compression:
@ Other proposal of interpretation of Eurocode 3 formulas for uniaxial bending and axial
compression (see comments in IX.d.2.2) using buckling reduction factors xY or xZ according to
the maior axis:
Nx.Sd + My.Sd Nx.Sd + kLT(My.Sd Nx.Sd e N y ) 51

Y Y
X z Aeff- f
x LTWeff.y - f
YMl YMl
where PM ( P M ~P, M is~the equivalent uniform moment factor related to the shape of the bending
moment (MSd + Nx.Sd eN):
M 1177711
PM= 1,8 - 0,7 w
-1IWI1
YM WIP
PM= 133
-=TV
PM= 194
where &ff, Weff-y,Weff.z, eN.y,eN., are effective properties of cross-section defined in chapter V.
168
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment J
1X.e Verifications at ULS for (NSd ,VSd)
(1) If the design values of shear force
where VplzRd, VplyRd are the design plastic shear resistances about minor (zz) and
major (yy) axes (see table IX.8),
no reduction of the tension or compression resistances is needed. With this condition the
design value of axial force Nx.Sd shall be checked separately according to chapter VI
(tension) or chapter VII (compression).
IX.e.1 Resistance of cross-section to (Nsd,Vsd)
[5.4.9 (311 (1) For members submitted to combined axial force Nx.Sd and shear force (Vz.Sd or vy.sd)if
1- then it is proposed that each cross-section shall satisfy the following
criterion:
where NV.Rd is the reduced design resistance of the cross-section allowing for shear
force (see table IX.8).
Table M.8 Reduced design resistance NVJd allowing for shear force
Combined loading
- I
(A - Pz Av.z)fy
Nx.Sd -t VzSd NVz.Rd =
YMO
Nx.Sd -I-Vy.Sd (A - Py AV.y)fy

NVy.Rd =
YMO
\2
=b
/
Vy.Sd - AV, f y
py VpCy.Rd -l] withVply.Rd - YMO*
If Wx.Sd)tension, A is the gross cross-section or net section (Anet) (see

chapter VI),
If(Nx.Sd)compression, A is the gross cross-section for class 1,2 or 3 cross-section,

or effective cross-section (A& for class 4 cross-section
(see chapter VII).
169
M.f Verifications at ULS to (Nsd ,Vsd,Msd)
(1) The verification of members submitted to combined axial force, shear forces and bending
moments shall be performed with different (N,V,M) interaction rules about:
1) the resistance of the cross-section (IX.f. l),

2) the stability of web (IX.f.2)
(2) All the (N,V,M) interaction formulas depend on the class of cross-sections.
(3) Uniaxid bending (My.Sd or Mz.Sd) and biaxial bending (My.Sd and Mz.Sd) combined with
shear forces (VZ.Sd and Vy.Sd) and with axial force Nx.Sd are presented in the following
chapters.
M.f.1 Resistance of cross-section to (Nsd,Vsd,Msd)
(1) If the design values of shear force
where Vp[zRd, Vp[y.Rd are the design plastic shear resistances about minor (zz) and
major b y ) axes (see table IX.9),
no reduction needs to be made in combination of bending moment and axial force. With
this condition the members shall be verified to combined (NSd, MSd) loading according to
chapter IX. d.
15.4.9 (3)] (2) If the design values of shear force1-1 (high shear) , the design resistance
of the cross-section to combinations of moment and axial force should be calculated
according to Eurocode 3 with a reduced yield strength ml for the shear area (AV)
The interaction formulas (N,V,M) proposed in the following to IX.f.1.4)

in case of high shear are simplifications replacing
properties of cross-sections: A, Aeff, wpLWe[,weff.
170
IX.f.l.1 Uniaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-section
(1) For the plastic resistance of class 1 or 2 cross-sections submitted to combined axial force
(Nx.sd) with shear forces and uniaxial bending moments ((V,.Sd and My.sd) or (Vy.Sd and
MZ.sd)),if the design values of shear force
or, (high shear)
then relevant interaction between (NSd,VSd,MSd) shall be considered.
In this case the design value of bending moment MSd shall satisfy the following cntenon
if the level of axial load n is high:
where MN.VRd is the reduced design plastic resistance moment allowing for the axial
load and shear force (MN.vsyRd(about major axis (yy) bending),
MN.v.,.Rd (about minor axis (zz)bending))(see table E.9),
n is the level of axial load (see table IX.9)
where NprRd is the design plastic resistance of the cross-section

(2) If the level of axial load ns is low (see table K.9, for the limiting values of n), then the
reduction of the plastic resistance moment may be neglected and the applied bending
moment MSd combined with shear forceVsd shall be verified according to the rules given
in chapter VIII.g.l.l. On the other hand the axial load Nx.Sd shall be verified in
combination with shear forces VSd according to chapter K.e.
Table m.9 Reduced design plastic resistance moment MN.V.Rd allowing for axial load
ans shear force for class 1 or 2 cross-sections
r5.4.91 Rolled and Values of the limit a If high level of axial load Nx.Sd : if
welded I-sections
A (
MN.V.y.Rd = 1-n-pz )wpf.y -
II fY
1-a YMO
y&-y
A -2b tf ’
Hollow sections Values of the limit a I

If high level of axial load Nx.Sd : if ns > a1
-@-
Y- 8-Y
a=
A-2bt
A
[
0,5 + -
;
MN.V.z.Rd = 1-n-py )pl.z -
fY
YMO
For a plate
withoutbolt holes
-
Notes : - n=- Nx Sd ns -
--Nx.Sd
AfY fY
YMO
- The values of pz and py are given on the following page.
- Limitation of MN.V.Rd obtained from this table:
MN.v.Rd IM pLRd (design plastic resistance moment)
WPLY f Y
MN.V.y.Rd Mpl.y.Rd = yMo
in other words,
WpLz f y
MN.V.z.Rd Mpf.z.Rd = yMo
172
pz =(I Vz.Sd
vpf .z.Rd
-I)
2
withvpf.z.Rd -
- A",
YMO
fy
IX.f.l.2 Biaxial bending of class 1 or 2 cross-section
[5.4.8.i(ii)] (1) For the plastic resistance of class 1 or 2 cross-sections submitted to combined axial force
(Nx.sd),with shear forces and biaxial bending moments ((Vz.Sd and My.sd) and (Vy.Sd and
Mz.Sd)), if the design values of shear force
I[ MY-Sd
MN.V.y.Rd
r +[
then the following criterion is proposed:
Mz.Sd
MN.V.z.Rd
]" 61)
where MN.V.y.Rdand MN.Vmz.Rdare the reduced design plastic resistance moment allowin
for the axial load and shear force (see table IX.9),
aandp are constants taken as follows:
- for I and H sections: a = 2 ; p = Sn, but p 2 1

- for circular tubes: a=2 ; p = 2
- for rectangular hollow sections: a =p= 1,66 2 , b u t a = p S 6
1- 1,13n
- for solid rectangles and plates: a = p = 1,73 + 1,8 n3
1X.f.1.3 Bending of class 3 cross-section
[5.4.8.2] (1) For t,,e elastic resistance of class 3 cross-sections submit,sd to combin,rl axial load
(Nx.Sd), shear forces (Vz.Sd, Vy.Sd) and biaxial bending moments (My.Sd and Mz.Sd) the
following proposed criterion shall be satisfied in case of high shear( Vsd > 0,5OVp[.Rd):
Ref. 4, table 5.16
where p = maximum value of (pz, py)

where pz and py are given in chapter IX.f. 1.1
173
(2) In case of uniaxial bending moment combined with axial load and shear force the
following cntena shall be satisfied in case of high shear(VSd > 0,50 Vp[.Rd):
- for bending about major axis (Nx.sd, VZ.sd and My.sd) :
- for bending about minor axis (Nx.Sd, Vy.Sd and Mz.Sd) :
M.f.1.4 Bending of class 4 cross-section
p.4.8.31 (1) For the elastic resistance of class 4 cross-sections submitted to combined axial force
(Nx.Sd), shear forces (Vz.Sd, Vy.Sd) and biaxial bending moments W S d and MzSd) the
following proposed cntenon shall be satisfied in case of high shear( Vsd > 0,50Vpc-Rd):
Nx.Sd + MY-Sd + Nx.Sd eNY + Mz.Sd Nx.Sd eNz 1-

f Y f Y f Y
Aeff - Weff .y - Weff.z -
YMO YMO YMO
where A,ff is the effective area of the cross-section when subject to uniform
compression (single Nx.sd),
W,ff is the effective section modulus of the cross-section when subject only to
moment about the relevant axis(sing1e My.Sd , single Mz.sd) ,
eN is the shift of the relevant centroidal axis (eNy, eNz) when the cross-section
is subject to uniform compression (single Nx.sd) ,
P is the maximum value of (pz, py),
pz and py are given in chapter IX.f.l.l
where
(2) In case of uniaxial bending moment combined with axial load and shear force the
following criteria shall be satisfied :
- for bending about major axis (Nx.Sd, Vz.Sd and My.Sd):
- for bending about minor axis (Nx.Sd, Vy.Sd and Mz.Sd):
Weff .Z
YMO YMO
174
[5.6.7.2] (1) If webs are submitted to combined axial load Nx.Sd, shear force Vz.Sd and bending
4
moment My.Sd and, if they have ratio - exceeding the limits given in table VI11.7, then
they shall be checked for resistance to shear buckling.
(2) The interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance is shown in table
VIII. 14 according to the simple post-critical method.
(3) The web may be assumed to be satisfactory if one of the three following checks (A, B or
C) according to the loading level (VZ.Sd,My.Sd) shall be satisfied:
[5.6.7.2 (111 A) If the design value of bending moment
1- 9
where MN.fxd is the reduced design plastic moment resistance of a cross-section

consisting of the flanges only and allowing for axial force; proposal for
cross-section with equal flanges:
- for class 1,2 or 3
where b, tf, h are flange width, flange thickness, height of profile (see
table 0. l),
beff is the effective width of the compression flange (see
chapter V),
eM is the shift of the centroidal major axis (yy) when the
cross-section consisting of flanges only is subject to
then the design value of shear force shall satisfy :

I
where VbaRd is the design shear resistance buckling of the web according to simple
post-critical method (see chapter VIII.d.2).
175
I Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildinns-IX Members with combined axial force and bending moment I
[5.6.7.2 (211 B) If the design values of bending moment and shear force
then the bending moment shall satisfy :
1- 7
where MNeyXd is the redudced design resistance moment of the cross-section

allowing for axial load depending on classes of cross-sections (see
chapter IX.d.l.l, IX.d.1.3, IXd.1.4).
p.6.7.2 (3)] C) If the design values of bending moment and shear force
IMy.Sd > MN.f.Rdl and Ivz.Sd 0950 vbiRdI 9
then the bending moment and the shear force shall satisfy the three following checks :
where MN.+LyXd is the reduced design plastic resistance moment of the cross-section
allowing for axial load :
176
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - X Transverse forces on webs 1
X TRANSVERSE FORCES ON WEBS (F ;(F,N,V,M))
177
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - X Transverse forces on webs I
X TRANSVERSE FORCES ON WEBS (F ;(F,N,V,M))

X.a Generalities
determines the design values for the following effects of actions which are applied to the
web of members and which shall be checked at ultimate limit states:
transverse forces with separate or combined internal forces and moment acting in the plane
of the web:
' I I
FSdl (FSd z
I
v v
1,
I
I
I Nx.Sd Nx.Sd
II I
x - ' I--- .*y I -**]**-
---
I
I
I
Y *-
I I
I %.Sd My.Sd
I
2
I
[5.7.1(2)] The transverse forces FSd may be applied in different ways:
- either, through one flange
- or, to one flange and transferred through the web directly to the other flange.
[5.7.1(1)] (3) The resistance of an unstiffened web to transverse forces applied through a flange, should
be cheked for all the three following modes of failure (see table X.1) :
. crushing of the web close to the flange, accompagnied by plastic deformations of
the flange (see chapter X.C.~),
. crippling of the web in the form of localised buckling and crushing of the web
close to the flange, accompagnied by plastic deformation of the flange (see chapter
X.d. l),
. buckling of the web over most of the depth of the member (see chapter X.d.2)
[5.7.1(6)] (4) In addition the effect of the transverse force on the moment resistance of the member
should be considered : resistance to local buckling (see chapter X.b) and yield criterion
(see chapter X.c. 1)
Table X . l Failure modes due to load introduction

Ref.4
Crushing Crippling Buckling
table 5.36
I
L
I
II 'T I
/ - I
'-'
I
I I
Previous page
is blank 179
(Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - X Transverse forces on webs 1
X. b Classification of cross-section
[5.3.6] (1) The effects of significant transverse compressive stresses on the local buckling resistance
of a web shall be taken into account in design. Such stresses may arise from transverse
forces on a member and at member intersections.
(2) The presence of significant transverse compressive stresses may effectively reduce the
maximum values of the depth-to-thickness ratios d/tw for class 1, class 2 and class 3 webs
below those given in chapter V, depending on the spacing of any web stiffeners.
(3) A recognised method of verification should be used. Reference may be made to the
application rules for stiffened plating given in ENV 1993-2 Eurocode 3: Part 2 (which is in
preparation).
x.c Resistance of webs to (F,N,V,M)
x.c.1 Yield criterion to (F,N,V,M)

[5.4.10]
(1) The web of a member subject to a transverse force in t x plane of the web (see table X.2)
in addition to any combinations of moment and axial force on the cross-section, shall at all
points satisfy the criteria given in table X.3.
[Fig. 5.4.31
Table X.2 Stresses in web panel due to bending moment, axial force and transverse force
(a) Lavout
-I
I CO 0D I ) -
I
f € E m o z
(b) Stresses in element E (c) Stresses in panel ABCD I (d) Equivalent stresses
180
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildinps - X Transverse forces on webs I
rable X.3 Yieldcriteria to be satisfied by the web
[form. (5.42)]
Class 1 or 2
(plastic distribution [ Oxm.Ed ]z +[ ]2 Oz.Ed -k[ OxmEd ][ OZ.Ed ] ~ 1 - p ~
r-[
of stresses) fy/YMO fylYMO fylYMO fylYMO
[form. (5.41)]
Class 3 or 4 [ ]2+[
Ox.Ed
f y /YMO
Oz.Ed
f y IYMO
OxEd
fylyMO
][ Oz.Ed 151
fy lYM0
If VSd > 0,5 .Vpmd (high shear) :
[form. (5.44)]
Class 1 or 2
plastic distribution [ OxmEd ]i+[ Oz.Ed -k[ Oxm.Ed ][ OzEd ] 51- pm -
of stresses)
r +[
fylyMO f y /YMO y YMO fy/yMO
[form. (5.43)]
Class 3 or 4 [ OxEd
f y /YMO
Oz.Ed
f y /?MO
]2 -[ Ox.Ed
fylYMO
][ Oz.Ed
fy/YMO
15 1-p
where OX.Ed is the design value of the local longitudinal stress due to
moment and axial force at the point (see table X.2),
%.Ed is the design value of the stress at the same point due to
transverse force (see table X.2),
Oxm.Ed is the design value of the mean longitudinal stress in the
web(see table X.2),
Ox.Ed , UzEd and Oxrn.Ed are taken as positive for compression and as negative foI
tension,
prn = Mw.Sd / qLw.Rd 7
p = (2VSd/VpLRd- 1>2 9
where Mw.Sd is the design value of the moment in the web,
MpLw.Rd = 0925 d2 fy 1YMO *
and k is obtained as follows :
for O X m . ~ dOzEd
/ 5 0: k = 1- pm
for Oxm.Ed/ Oz.Ed > 0: if pm 5 0,5: then k = 0,5 (1 -k p,)
if Prn> 0,5: then k = 1,5 (1 - )p,
181
/Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - X Transverse forces on webs I
x.c.2 Crushing resistance to F

p 7 . 3 (i)] (1) The design crushing resistance Ry.Rd of the web of an I, H or U section (see table X.4)
should be obtained from:
[form. (5.71)]
where ss is the length of stiff bearing determined by dispersion of load through

solid steel material which is properly fixed in place at a slope of 1:1, (see
table X.5); no dispersion should be taken through loose packs,
[form. (5.72)]
where bf I 25tf,
0f.m is the longitudinal stress in the flange.
[5.7.3 (3)] (2) At the end of a member sy should be halved.
Table X.4 Load introduction
r i g . 5.7.21
Table X.5 Length of stiff bearing, s,
I
I----- I-------1
- - 1
I / \ I
I .: 1 . I
I
I
ss I
182
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - X Transverse forces on webs
X.d Stability of webs to (F ;(F,M))

X.d.1 Crippling resistance to (F ;(F,M))
X.d.l.1 Crippling resistance to F
[5.7.4 (l)] (1) For s 235 up to s 420 steel grades the design crippling resistance Ra.Rd of the web (see
table X.4) should be obtained from:
[form. (5.77)]
where ss is the length of stiff bearing from table X.5. but sdd 5 0,2,
tw is the thickness of the web,
tf is the thickness of the flange,
d is the depth of the web between the flanges,
E is the modulus of elasticity,
fyw is the yield strength of the web.
[hnexD] (2) For S 460 steel grade only the design crippling resistance Ra.Rd of the web should be
obtained from the formula given X.d. 1.1 (1) but replacing the factor 0,5 by 0,6.
X.d.1.2 Crippling resistance to (F,M)
Fable X.6 Interaction formula of crippling resistance and moment resistance

F
f5.7.4 (211 (1) Where the member is also subject to bending moments, the following criteria should be
satisfied (see table X.6):
[form. (5.78)]
where Mc.Rd is the design noment resistance of the cross-section (see chapter V1n.e. 1).
183
X.d.2 Buckling resistance to F
[5.7.5 (1)l (1) The design buckling resistance Rb.Rd of the web of an I, H or U section (see table X.4)
should be obtained by considering the web as a virtual compression member with an
effective breadth beffobtained from :
[form. (5.79)] be, = dh' + s i

The table X.7 gives values of beff for different cases of loads.
p.7.5 (3)] (2) The buckling resistance should be determined from chapter VII.c.2.1 using buckling curve
c and PA = 1 (table V11.6).
p.7.5 (411 (3) The buckling length of the virtual compression member should be d e t e h n e d from the
conditions of lateral and rotational restraint at the flanges at the point of load application.
[figure 5.7.31
Table X.7 Effective breadth b,fi for web buckling resistance
h
be, = ? + a
but be, 5 h
beff =-14- h +ss + a + -ss

2 2
184
X.e Stability of webs to compression flange buckling
1 Table X.8 Compressionflange buckling in plane of the web
[5.7.7] (1) To prevent the possibility of the compression flange buckling in the plane of the web
(seetable K 8 ) , the thickness ratio at, shall be lower than the value given in table X.9.
1 Table X.9 Maximum width-to-thickness ratio a t w

Ref. 4
Steel grade of
table 5.20
flange 235 S 275 s 355 S 420 S 460
at, 360 300 240 200 185
(2) I and H hot-rolled sections never meet such problem of compression flange buckling in
plane of the web.
185
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI Connections I
XI CONNECTIONS
-. ---7
Previous page
is blank
187
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI Connections I
XI CONNECTIONS
X1.a Generalities
[6.1.1 (l)] (1) All connections shall have a design resistance such that the structure remains effective and
is capable of satisfying all the basic design requirements given in chapter 1.a.
(2) The partial safety factors y~ concern the resistances of bolts (y~b),of welds (mw), of
members and cross-sections ( y ~ o ,YMI, ym)and the slip resistance of preloaded bolts
( y ~ ~ .Their
~ ~ numerical
) . values are provided in table 1.2.
[6.1.2 (l)] (3) The forces and moments applied to connections at the ultimate limit state shall be
determined by global analysis in conformity with chapter IV.
[6.1.4 (l)] (4)Connections may be designed by distributing the internal forces and moments in whatever
rational way is best, provided that:
(a) the assumed internal forces and moments are in equilibrium with applied forces and
moments,
(b) each element in the connection is capable of resisting the forces or stresses assumed
in the analysis, and
(c) the deformations implied by this distribution are within the deformation capacity of
the fasteners or welds and the connected parts.
f6.2 (U1 (5) Members meeting at a joint shall normally be arranged with their centroidal axes
intersecting at a point.
i6.2 (91 (6) Where there is eccentricity at intersections this shall be taken into account in the design of
the joint and the member.
16.2 (311 (7) In the case of bolted connections of angles and tees with at least two bolts per connection,
the setting out lines of the bolts may be regarded as the centroidal axes for the purpose of
intersection at joints.
X1.b Bolted connections

[6.51
XI.b.1 Positioning of holes

[6.5.1.1]
(1) The positioning of holes for bolts shall be such as to prevent corrosion and local buckling
and to facilitate the installation of the bolts.
(2) The minimum and maximum distances between bolts and recommended distances (asused
in table XI.6 for the bolt bearing resistances) are given in table XI.l. Those values are
valid for structures not exposed to weather or other corrosive influences.
XI.b.2 Distribution of forces between bolts
[6.5.4 (l)] (1) Where the design shear resistance Fv.Rd of a bolt (see chapter XI.b.5.2.1) is less than the
design bearing resistance Fb.Rd (see chapter XI.b.S.l), the distribution of internal forces
between bolts at the Ultimate Limit State shall be proportional to the distance from the
centre of rotation (see table XI.2).
[6.5.4 (2)] (2) In other cases of bearing type connections the distribution of internal forces between bolts
at the Ultimate Limit State may be plastic (see table XI.3).
Previous page
is blank
189
I
~ [Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI Connections I
I
Ref. 4
Table XI.1 Designation of dktances between bolts
table 6.2
I
1,2 6I e1 I maximum ( 12t ; 150 mm)
;$
1,5 do I e2 I maximum ( 12t ; 150 mm)
2,2 6 I p1 I minimum ( 14t ; 200 mm)
ei 3,O do Ip2 Iminimum ( 14t ;200 mm)
e2
Bolts Recommended distances in mm
shear joint
P1;p2 e1 e2
I
M 12 40 30 25
e2T
I
p2
M 16 55 40 30
M 20 70 50 40
M 24 80 60 50
M
ei pi
I
M 27 70 90 55
M 30
100 75 60
tension or compression joint M 36
120 90 70
- The designations e2 and p2 also apply when distances measured are not in the direction of
stress.
- In case of smaller values of e2 and p2 see Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2).
[figure 6.5.; Linear distribution of loads between fasteners

I'able XI.2
0,s F h.Sd
F h.Sd
I
VSd
MSd
MSd
Fh.Sd =-
5P
190
Ref. 4
rable XI.3 Possible plastic distribution of loads between fasteners. Any realistic
table 6.4
combination could be used, e.g.
F v.Sd
\
) MSd
F b.Rd 4 VSd
- “Sd -rb.Rd
Fv.Sd - 2
M
Fh.Sd = - 2Fb.Rd
2P
XI.b.3 Prying forces

[6.5.9 (111 (1) Where bolts are required to carry an applied tensile force, they shall be proportioned to
[Annex 4 also resist the additional force due to prying action, see table XI.4.
[Fig*6-5-81
ITable XI.4 Prying forces
prying force
XI.b.4 Categories of bolted connections
[65.3] (1) The design of a bolted connection loaded in shear or in tension shall conform with one of
the following categories: see table XIS.
191
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildinns - XI Connections I
[table 6.5.21 Fable X I S Categories of bolted connections

Shear connections
Category I Criteria I Remarks
A Fv.Sd I Fv.Rd No preloading required.
Bearing type Fv.Sd I FbRd All grades from 4.6 to 10.9.
F v . q .ser I Fv.Rd.ser Reloaded high strength bolts.
B
Slip-resistant at SLS h.Sd I Fv.Rd No slip at the serviceability limit
Fv.Sd I FbRd State-
C Fv.sd 5 Reloaded high strength bolts.
Fs.Rd
slip-resistant at ULS Fv.Sd I Fb.m No slip at the ultimate limit state.
~~~
Tension connections
Category
D
Non-preloaded
FtSd
Criteria
5 FtRd I Remarks
No preloading required.
All grades from 4.6 to 10.9.
E Ft.Sd I FtRd Reloaded high strength bolts.
Reloaded
design shear force per bolt for the serviceability limit state
design shear force per bolt for the ultimate limit state
design shear resistance per bolt
design bearing resistance per bolt
design slip resistance per bolt for the serviceability limit state
design slip resistance per bolt for the ultimate limit state
design tensile force per bolt for the ultimate limit state
design tension resistance per bolt
XI.b.5 Design ULS resistance of bolts

[6.5.5.(2)] (1) At the Ultimate Limit States the design shear force Fv.Sd on a bolt shall not exceed the
lesser of
- the design bearing resistance FbRd (see chapter XI.b.5.1)
- the design shear resistance FvRd see chapter XI.b.5.2)
16.5.5. (3)] (2) At the Ultimate Limit States the design tensile force Ft.Sd, inclusive of any force due to
prying action, shall not exceed the lesser of:
- the design tension resistance FLRd ( S e chapter XI.b.5.3)
- the design punching shear resistance Bp&d (see chapter XI.b.5.4)
(3) At the Ultimate Limit States bolts subject to both shear force and tensile force shall satisfy
the interaction criterion of chapter XI.b.5.5.
XI.b.5.1 Bearing resistance

[table 6.5.31 (1) The design bearing resistance shall be taken as:
IFb.Rd = El (see table XI.6 for Fb;&

[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI Connections 1
Ref. 4
table 6.6 rable XI.6 Bearing resistance per bolt for recommended detailing for t = 10 mm in [kNJ
‘-I I
e2
I
+kt-t
e1 pl
Boltdiameter d [mm] I 12 I 16 I 20 I 22 I 24 I 27 I 30 I 36
S 420 115,4 148,l 189,4 210,l 230,s 253,l 284,l 346,2

s 460 122,3 157,O 2@,8 222,7 244,6 268,3 301,l 3669
high bearing e1 40 55 70 75 80 90 loo 120
P19 P2 50 70 85 95 100 115 130 150
e2 35 50 60 65 70 80 90 110
S 235 io8,o 144,o 180,O 198,O 216.0 243,O 270,O 3240
S 275 117,O 156,O 195,O 214,5 234,O 263,3 2923 351,O
s 355 147,O 1%,0 245,O 269,5 294,O 330,s 367,5 441,O
S 420 150,O 200,O 250,O 275,O 300,O 3373 375,O 450,O
s 460 159,O 212,O 265,O 291,5 318,O 357,s 3973 477,O
193
XI.b.5.2 Shear resistance

XI.b.5.2.1 General case
[table 6.5.31 (1) The design shear resistance of a bolt shall be taken as:
(see table XI.7 for Fv.&
Ref. 4
table 6.7 Table XI.7 Shear resistance per bolt and per shear plane in [ICNJ
where C1 = 0,6 for strength grades 4.6,5.6 and 8.8

C2 = 0,5 for strength grades 4.6, 5.8,6.8 and 0.9
Bolt diameter d [mm] 12 16 20 22 24 27 30 36

Hole diameter &[m] 13 18 22 24 26 30 33 39
Tensilestressareaof 84,3 157 245 303 353 459 561 817
bolt A, [mm21
Shear resistance
XI.b.5.2.2 Long joints

[6.5.10.(l)]
(1) Where the distance Lj between the centres of the end bolts in a joint is more than 15 d,
where d is the nominal diameter of the bolts, the design shear resistance Fv.Rd of all the
bolts calculated as specified in chapter XI.b.5.2.1 as appropriate shall be reduced by
multiplying it by a reduction factor PLf, given by (see table X1.8) :
Lj -15 d
[form. (6.1I)] PLf =1- but 0,75 5 PLf I1,O
1
200 d-
..
I
[Fig. 6.5.10
Table XI.8 Long joints
T--------
F
0,501 II
I
I
15 d
I
I
65 d
Lj F 1 -
- 1
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I
I I I I I I
I O
--.) F
194
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI Connections
XI.b.5.3 Tension resistance

[table 6.531
[6.5.5. (3)]
Ref. 4
table 6.8
XI.b.5.4 Punching shear resistance

[6.5.5. (4)] (1) When the plate thickness tp is smaller than 0,5.d, the design punching shear resistance of
the bolt head and the nut, Bp.Rd shall be checked and evaluated as follows:
[form. (6.5)]
where tp is the thickness of the plate under the bolt head or the nut
d, is the mean of the across points and across flats dimensions of the bolt
head or the nut, whichever is smaller; in other words dm is the mean
diameter of inscribed and circumscribed circles of bolt head or nut:
dm = m h h u m (dm bolt head, dm n u b
XI.b.5.5 Shear and tension interaction
[6.5.5. (5)] (1) Bolts subject to both shear force and tensile force shall in addition satisfy the following
criterion which is illustrated in table XI. 10:
[form. (6.6)]
1 Table XI.10 Interaction formula of shear resistance and tension resistance for bolts
195
XI.b.6 ULS resistance of element with bolt holes
XI.b.6.1 Net section ULS resistance

p 4 . 3 (l)] see chapter VI.b.2
XI.b.6.2 ULS resistance of angle with a single row of bolt
[6.5.2.3] see chapter V1.c. 1
XI.b.6.3 Block shear ULS resistance
[6.5.2.2] see chapter VIIId. 1
XI.b.7 High strength bolts in slip-resistant connections at SLS
[6.5.8]
(1) When the slip resistance is needed at serviceability limit states the design for a preloaded
high-strength bolt shall be carried out as given hereafter. In the ultimate limit state the bolt
is considered as a bolt in shear and bearing without friction (see chapter XI.b.5).
(2) In connections designed for slip-resistance at serviceability limit states the design
serviceability shear load should not exceed the design slip resistance Fsad.
(3) The design slip resistance of a preloaded high strength bolt shall be taken as:
IFsaRd= (see table XI. 11 for Fs.&

Yhls.ser
(4) When the slip resistance is needed at ultimate limit state, see chapter E6.5.81 of Eurocode 3
Part 1.1 (Ref. 2).
~ ~~
Ref. 4
table 4.5 Table X L l l Characteristic slip resistance per bolt and per friction interface for 8.8 and 10.9
bolts, where the holes in all the plies have standard nominal clearances
Bolt diameter d [mm] 12 16 20 22 24 27 30 36

Tensile stress area of bolt 84,3 157 245 303 353 459 561 817
As Cm2l
p = 0,2
Fs.m for 8.8 bolts [IrNJ 9,4 17,6 27,4 33,9 393 51,4 62,8 91,5
class D
p = 0,2 11,8 22,O 34,3 42,4 49,4 64,3 78,5 114,4
F s . e for 10.9 bolts [kNI classD ,
surface class description I multiDlication factor
- surfaces blasted with shot or grit, with any
loose rust removed, no pitting. 2,5
class A (p = 0,5)
- surfaces blasted with shot or grit, and
spray-metallized with aluminium or a zinc-
based coating.
- surfaces blasted with shot or grit, and
class B (p = 0,4) painted with an alkali-zinc silicate paint 270
class C (p = 0,3) 1 - surfaces cleaned by wire brushing or flame
cleaning, with any loose rust removed. 195
196
x1.c Welded connections

XI.c.1 Type of weld
[6.6.2.1]
(1) Welds are generally be classified as (see table XI. 12):
- fillet welds
- butt welds (with full or partial penetration)
Ref. 4
table 6.10 Table XI.12 Common types of welded joints
Type of weld Type of joint
Butt ioint Tee-butt joint Lap joint
Fillet weld
I I
1 I
I I
I I
1-1-
Full penetration
butt weld
I single V ' - '- single bevel I
I I
E X I
' doubleV I
I I
1-r I
il single U
I
J-L single J
i
I
m
I I
brt.ial penetration
butt weld
doubleU
double V
I
'
--I-
-- -
I I
double U
XI.c.2 Fillet weld

[6.6.2.2. (i)] (1) Fillet may be used for connecting parts, where the fusion faces form an angle of 60' to 120
[6.6.2.2.(2)] (2) Smaller angles than 60" are also permitted. However, in such cases the weld shall be
considered to be a partial penetration butt weld.
[6.6.2.2. (3)] (3) For angles over 120°, fillet welds shall not be relied upon to transmit forces.
197
XI.c.3 Design resistance of fillet weld

XI.c.3.1 Throat thickness
[6.6.5.2.(i)] (1) The throat thickness, a, of a fillet weld shall be taken as the height of the largest triangle
which can be inscribed within the fusion faces and the weld surface, measured
perpendicular to the outer side of this triangle(see table XI. 13).
Ref. 4
table 6.13 Table XI.13 Throat thickness
1
~ ~~
(a) Design sections of fillet welds (b) Design throat thickness aupfor
submerged arc welding
[6.65.2.(211 (2) The throat thickness of a fillet weld should not be less than 3 mm.
l6.6.5.2. (411(3) In the case of a fillet weld made by an automatic submerged arc process, the throat
thickness may be increased by 20% or 2 mm, whichever is smaller, without resorting to
procedure trials.
Ref. 4 (4) The design force used for checking fillet welds should be taken as the resultant of the
6.3.4.2 (4) forces to be transmitted by the weld (see table XI. 14).
Ref. 4 rable XI.14 Action eflecfs in fillet welds

table 6.14
198
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI Connections
XI.c.3.2 Design resistance

[6.6.5.3] (1) The design resistance of a fillet weld shall be taken as follows
,FI 5 (see table IX.15 for Fw.Rk)
Ref. 4
table 6.15 Table XI.15 Resistance of a fillet weld
fu - nominal ultimate tensile strength of the weaker part joined

a - throat thickness
L - weld length
pw - correlation factor
~
Weld resistance F [wfor 100 mm weld length

w in ~
~ ~~ ~ - ~ ~ ~
Throat thickness 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
a [ml
- For different weld lengths L in [mm] multiply the values given in the table by
- For steel grades greater than S 235 the values of fu are issued from table 11.2 (prEN
[id-
10113) and are valid for plate thickness not greater than 40 mm.
XI.c.4 Design resistance of butt weld
[6.6.2.3 (111 (1) A full penetration butt weld is defined as a butt weld that has complete penetration and
fusion of weld and parent metal throughout the thickness of the joint.
[6.6.2.3 (211 (2) A partial penetration butt weld is defined as a butt weld that has joint penetration which is
less than the full thickness of the parent material.
[6.6.6.1(1)] (3) The design resistance of a full penetration butt weld shall be taken as equal to the design
resistance of the weaker of the parts joined.
[6.6.6.2 (111 (4)The design resistance of a partial penetration butt weld shall be determined as for a deep
penetration fillet weld.
[6.6.6.2(2)] (5) The throat thickness of a partial penetration butt weld shall be taken as the depth of
penetration that can consistently be achieved.
199
XI.c.5 Joints to unstiffened flanges

[6.6.8 (l)] (1) In a tee-joint of a plate welded to an unstiffened flange of an I, H or a box section, a
reduced effective breadth shall be taken into account both for the parent material and for
the welds(see table XI.16).
[6.6.8 (211 (2) For an I or H section the effective breadth beff should be obtained from:
I It, + 2 r + 7 t f I I
where fy is the design strength of member

fyp is the design strength of plate
[6.6.8 (3)] (3) If beff is less than 0,7 times the full breadth, the joint should be stiffened.
[6.6.8 (4)] (4) For a box section the effective breadth beff should be obtained from:
I (2tw+5tf I
[6.6.8 (5)] (5) The welds connecting the plate to the flange shall have a design resistance per unit length
not less than the design resistance per unit width of the plate.
Ref. 4
rable XI.16 Effective breadth of an unstiffened tee joint
table 6.16
I I
I I t’;
I I I
I I I
I
!-----
I
!-----I ‘I
X1.d Pin connections
[6.5.13] Reference may be made to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2)
X1.e Beam-to-column connections
i6.91 Reference may be made to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2)
[Annex r]
X1.f Design of column bases
[6.11] Reference may be made to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 (Ref. 2)
[Annex L]
200
I EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XII Design of bracing system J
XI1 DESIGN OF BRACING SYSTEM
20 1
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XII Design of bracing system 1
XI1 DESIGN OF BRACING SYSTEM
XI1.a Generalities
(1) The definition of bracing system and its braced frame is given in chapter I.b.1 and in table
1.1.
(2) Examples of bracing system and its braced frame are given in table XIIS.
XII.a.1 Flow-chart XII: Elastic global analysis of bracing system according to EC 3
(1) The flow-chart XI1 aims to provide a general presentation of elastic global analysis of steel
bracing system according to Eurocode 3.
(2) The flow-chart XI1 is nearly similar to the flow-chart I about elastic global analysis of
steel frames according to Eurocode 3 because only two items are different:
- the bracing system should be designed to resist supplementary loads and
supplementary effects of global imperfections issued from the frame which it
braces (see the part in comments on XI1 and flow-chart I concerning the
"Generalities about Eurocode 3") and,
- the classification of sway or non-sway bracing system should be established with
the same criteria but with specific conditions (see comments on rows 5 and 6 in the
part "Choice of the type of global analysis for ULS" of XII).
(3) The flow-chart XII is divided in 3 parts:

XII.a. 1.1 general part (1 page)
XIl.a. 1.2 details (1 page)
XIl.a.l.3 comments (6 pages)
XII.a.l.1 Flow-chart XII: general

see the following page
XII.a.l.2 Flow-chart XII: details
see the second following page
Previous page
is blank
203
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI1 Design of bracing system I
Flow-chart XI1 : Elastic global analysis of bracing system according to Eurocode 3 (General)
-
IDW:
Actions
2
Predesign 3
SLS checks 4
Choice of the type of global analysis 6
for ULS 7
ULS global analysis of the bracing system 10
to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M)
13

I5
I
I
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XII Design of bracing system 1
Flow-chart XI1 :Elastic global analysis of bracing system according to Eurocode 3 (Details)
-
TDW:
Determination of load arrangements (EC1 and EC 8) I
I t
Load cases Load cases 2
for ULS [23.3.] for SLS [23.4.]
Redesign of memberk: beams & columns => Sectidns not fulfilled
I
with pinned /ind/or rigid connections I
3
_ _ _ _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---- - - - - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ -
ULS checks SLS checks not fulfilled 4
____------------------- -
IGlobal imperfections and global imperfections

of the bracing system
[5.2.4.4.]
of the braced frame
4
[5.2.4.3]
5
Non-sway bracing system n-sway bracing system [5.2.5.

-
VSd I0,l i 6
VCI
> 0.5 [A.fy / NSd]” 7
4 [5.2.4.2.(4)]
0,l < -I
VSd 0.25 J
Va 8
[5.2.6.2.(4)]
_ _ - _ - - -- - - - - - - - _ _ _ -- - - - - - - __ _________
I I
I
I FIRST IORDER ANALYSIS I D ORDER ANALYSIS 9
[ q m beo,de r s imperfectiob4 ]
f
’Non-sway mode buckling Sway mode buckling 10
length approach I [5.2.4.5.] I
[5.2.6.2(1)a)][5.2.6.2. (7)] :
length approach
[5.2.6.2(1)b)][5.2.6.2. (S)] :
with sway moments with sway moments in all
&,d
amdified bv factor amplified by factor 1,2 in members 11
i/(1-VSdiva) beams & connections [5.2.4.5.(3)] [5.2.4.5.(2)]
- -(
I
a-sway mode I L J~ sway mode L b
7
Non-sway mode L b
E I2
5
* *
I3
I
I
t E
0
I I Classification of cross4sections [Chap. 5131 14

I I I I
1 1
not fulfilled ( n $ ) f L
Checks of the in-pl 1s
7
Checks of the out-of-plane stability: members and/or frame buckling [Chap. 5.5.1 16
Checks of resistance I7
-__--------------------
c Checks of local effects (bucklin
___-___----------------
19
18
I Checks of connecti
205
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI1 Design of bracing system I
XII.a.1.3 Comments on Flow-chart XII
Generalities about Eurocode 3:

Definition of a bracing system and its braced frame: see chapter I.b.1 (table 1.1) and
chapter XI1.a.
[5.2.5.3 (?
[5.2.1.2 (I
[5.2.1.2 (1
[5.2.5.3 (f
the the effects the the global member
horizontal of global vertical and imperfections imperfections
loads imperfections horizontal of the bracing of the bracing
from the from the loads of the system system
braced frame braced frame xacing system
(a) (a) (b) (row 5) (row 10)
non-sway
bracing systems X X X X
bath 0)
sway bracing
systems (c) X X X X
aths @ and 0)
[5.2.5.3 (5
[5.2.5.3 (6
(c) use of design methods which make indirect allowance for second-order effects.
206
~ ~~ ~
[5.2.1.2 (3): - Second order analysis may (row 9) be used in all cases (types of bracing systems):
The second order elastic global analysis of the bracing system should
[5.2.5.3 (6): It
actions the the effects the the global member
horizontal of global vertical and imperfections imperfections
loads imperfections horizontal If the bracing of the bracing
from the from the loads of the system system
ypes of braced frame braced frame bracing system
(a) (a) (b) (row 5 ) (row 10)
) for sway
bracing systems
(path @) X X X X
(path 0) X I X I X X
:) for bracing
systems in genera X X X
( path@) (d)
[5.2.5.3 (5): Notes : (a) actions issued from the frames which are braced by the analysed bracing
system.
[5.2.5.3 (6):
(b) the horizontal and vertical loads which are directly applied to the bracing
[5.2.4.5 (3): system.
(c) members imperfections are introduced where necessary.
(d) the more complex possibility of second order global analysis of the frame
(path@) could be conservative because it allows the bypass of the "sway or
non-sway frame" classification and consequently :
- either the first order analysis might be sufficient,
- or, the introduction of member imperfections would not be necessary in
all members.
On the other hand, particular care shall be brought to the introduction of
member imperfections (e0.d) which would be imposed for the global
analysis in the realistic directions corresponding to the deformations of the
members for the failure mode of the frame; that failure mode of the frame
is related to the combination of applied external loads; otherwise, with
more favourable direction of member imperfections, the second order
global analysis might overestimate the bearing capacity of the frame.
In the flow-chart XI1 from path 0to path @ (from left to right) the proposed methods for
global analysis become more and more sophisticated.
207
EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI1 Design of bracing system
~ ‘Ref.
*-
row 5:
[5.2.4.4] - Global imperfections of the bracing system
- .
I see Table XII.2
@F2--.J.tttt ’
could be applied FI
in the form of c’1 t t t l 1
@ F1 7
4 / / 4 r f
* rows 7 to 17 : See comments on rows 9 to 19 of Flow-chart I
208
]Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XII Design of bracing system
XII.b Static equilibrium

(1) Reference may be made to chapter N.b.
XI1.c Load arrangements and load cases
XII.c.1 Generalities
(1) Load arrangements which may be applied to buildings are provided in chapter 1II.b.
(2) Load cases (see chapter 1II.c) may be established according to two procedures to study
structures submitted to actions:
- a general procedure presented in flow-chart III. 1 (chapter III) or,
- a particular procedure presented in flow-chart III.2 (chapter 111) which is applicable
for non-sway buildings because such structure may be studied by first order elastic
global analysis.
(3) Two types of load cases shall be considered:
- load cases for Serviceability Limit States and,
- load cases for Ultimate Limit States,
where differences are related to combination rules:
- see table 111.7 for SLS combinations of actions
- see table 111.8 for ULS combinations of actions
(4) A bracing system should be designed to resist different loads and effects of global
imperfections from the braced frame and of the bracing system itself (see comments on
flow-chart XI1 concerning the "generalities about Eurocode 3" (see chapter XI1.a. 1.3) and
see table XII. 1).
Table XII.l Load arrangements of the bracing system

a) The horizontal loads from the braced frame:
b) The effects of global imperfections from the braced frame:
c) The vertical and horizontal loads of the bracing system:
d) The global imperfections of the bracing system:

h
see chapter XII.c.2
209
XII.c.2 Global imperfections of the bracing system

[5.2.4.4(1)] (1) The effects of imperfections shall be allowed for in bracing system design which are
required to provide lateral stability within the length of beams or compression members,
by means of an equivalent geometric imperfection of the members to be restrained, in the
form of an initial bow imperfection, or of the equivalent stabilizing forces according to
table XII.2.
(2) The numerical values for the stabilizing force q are given in table XI1.3 according to the
following model
I
El
I 1
eo = -
where n' , is &e numbk: of members to be restrained
(3) Practical examples of such global imperfections are given in table XII.4 which presents
the case where the bracing system is required to stabilize a beam.
XII.d Bracing system stability
(1) Reference may be made to chapter 1V.d.
XEe First order elastic global analysis
(1) Reference may be made to chapter 1V.e.
XII.f Verifications at SLS
(1) Reference may be made to chapters IV.f.1 and VIKb.
m g Verifications at ULS
XII.g.1 Classification of the bracing system
XII.g.l.1 Non-sway bracing system
[5.2.5.3 (7)] (1) Where bracing system is a frame or sub-frame, it may itself be either sway or non-sway.
(2) Examples of sway frames are mentionned in chater I.b.2.

(3) In order to define the criterion used to classify a bracing system as sway or non-sway
reference may be made to comments on rows 5 and 6 of flow-chart XI1 (see chapter
XII.a.1.3).
(4) As the criterion of sway or non-sway bracing system classification depends on the total
vertical load, a same bracing system could be classified as sway according to a load case
and as non-sway according to another load case. Therefore the criterion of sway or non-
sway bracing system classification should be checkedfor each load case.
XII.g.2 ULS checks
[5.1.2(i)] (1) The frames shall be checked at ultimate limit states for the resistances of cross-sections,
members and connections. For those ULS checks reference may be made to the following
chapters:
- Classification of cross-sections: see chapter V
- Members in tension: see chapter VI
- Members in compression: see chapter VII
- Members in bending: see chapter VIII
- Members with combined axial force and bending moments: see chapter IX
- Transverse forces on webs: see chapter X
- Connections: see chapter XI
210
]Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XII Design of bracing system I
Ref. 4
table 5.7 Table XII.2 Bracing system imperfections
-initial bow imDerfection equivalent stabilizing forces
r r
L
Ref. 4
table 5.8
Table X11.3 Values for the equivalent stabilizing force q
I
I
\ I -I
q q 52,l-L E
2500
60,3 LG--
67,2 L
I I
I
5 -
-
INSd
ENSd
63.8 L
58,8 L
--
INS,
6 -
- INSd
71,8 L
--
INS,
167.9 L
62,2 L
5 -
- )=NSd
75,l
170.8
64,7
L
L
6 -
- INSd
96,6 L
89,6
--
INSd
80 L
L
-- 5 -
INSd - INSd 6 -
- INS, --
INS,
50,8 L 53,4 L 55,2 L 66 L
number of 2 3 4 5 6 7
panels
I ffllm
49/48
6, is the in-plane deflection of the bracing system due to ;Tcl plus any external loads.
21 1
I IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - XI1 Design of bracing system I
Table XII.4 Bracing system imperfections (examples)
@ k2Sd h2Sd k2Sd k2Sd

W
'lSd
I
212
EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendices I
APPENDICES
213
LRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix A :List of symbols J
APPENDIX A List of symbols
1. Latin symbols
designation of a buckling curve
throat thickness of filllet weld
geometrical data of the effects of actions
geometrical data for the resistance
design throat thickness for submerged arc welding
designation of a buckling curve
distance between fastener holes and edge
accidental action; area of building loaded by external pressure of wind;
area of gross cross-section
effective area of class 4 cross-section
effective area of class 4 cross-section subject to uniform compression (single
NxSd)
Aeff.M effective area of class 4 cross-section subject to uniaxial bending (single My.Sd or
single M,.sa)
net area of cross-section
reference area for cf (wind force)
tensile stress area of bolt
shear area of cross-section
effective shear area for resistance to block shear
shear area of cross-section according to yy axis
shear area of cross-section according to zz axis
designation of a buckling curve; flange width; building width
effective breadth
design punching shear resistance of the bolt head and the nut
designation of a buckling curve; outstand distance
altitude factor for reference wind velocity
dynamic factor for wind force
direction factor for reference wind velocity
exposure coefficient for wind pressure and wind force
wind force coefficient
external pressure coefficient for wind pressure
roughness coefficient for determination of Ce
topography coefficient for determination of Ce
temporary (seasonal) factor for reference wind velocity
nominal value related to the design effect of actions
factors for determination of F v . ~
factors for determination of M,
designation of a buckling curve; web depth
bolt diameter
mean diameter of inscribed and circumscribed circles of bolt head or nut
hole diameter
shift of relevant centroidal axis of the class 4 effective cross-section subject to
uniform compression (single Nx.sd)
Previous page
is blank
215
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix A :List of symbols 1
shift of the y centroidal axis of the class 4 effective cross-section subject to
uniform compression
eNz shift of the z centroidal axis of the class 4 effective cross-section subject to
uniform compression
shift of relevant centroidal axis of the class 4 effective cross-section subject to
uniaxial bending (single My.Sd or single M,.sd)
e0 equivalent initial bow imperfection
e0.d design value of equivalent initial bow imperfection
e19 e2 distance between hole fastener and edge
E modulus of elasticity or Young Modulus; effect of actions at SLS
ECCS European Convention for Constructional Steelwork
ECSC European Community of Steel and Coal
EC 1 Eurocode 1 (/l/)
EC 3 Eurocode3 u2/)
EC 8 Eurocode 8 (/3/)
Ed design value of the effect of action
Ek characteristic value of effects of actions at SLS
fd design natural frequency
fe natural frequency
fmin recommended limit of natural frequency
fU ultimate tensile strength
fub nominal value of ultimate tensile strength for bolt
fY yield strength
fy.b basic yield strength of the flat steel material before cold forming
fYb nominal value of yield strength for bolt
fYW
yield strength of the web
F, F1, F2 action (load, transverse force, imposed deformations, ...)
FC flow-chart
Fb.Rd design bearing resistance per bolt
Fb.Rk characteristic value of bearing resistance per bolt
Fd design value of action
Ffr friction force
Fh.Sd force on bolt calculted from MSd andor Fb.Rd
Fk characteristic value of action
FpRd design punching shear resistance per bolt
FSd design transverse force applied on web through the flange
FSk characteristic value of transverse force
Fs.Rd design slip resistance per bolt at the ultimate limit state
Fs.Rd.ser design slip resistance per bolt at the serviceability limit state
FS& caracteristic slip-resistance per bolt and per friction interface
FtRd design tension resistance per bolt
FtRk characteristic value of tension resistance per bolt
FtSd design tensile force per bolt for the ultimate limit state
Fv.Rd design shear resistance per bolt
FV.Rk characteristic value of shear resistance per bolt and per shear plane
Fv.Sd design shear force per bolt for the ultimate limit state
Fv.Sd.ser design shear force per bolt for the serviceability limit state
Fw resultant wind force
216
I Ref. EC 3 for non-swav buildings - ADDendix A :List of svmbols I
FW.Rk characteristic value of resistance force of fillet weld

Fw.Sd design force of fillet weld
g distributed permanent action; dead load
G permanent action
Gd design permanent action
Gk characteristic value of permanent action
h overall depth of cross-section; storey height; building height
h0 overall height of structure
H total horizontal load
i radius of gyration about relevant axis using the properties of gross cross-section
I second moment of area A
Ieff second moment of effective area 4ff (class 4 cross-section)
It torsional constant
IW warping constant
IZ second moment of area about zz axis
k subscript meaning characteristic (unfactored) value
k effective length factor
~ L T factor for lateral-torsional buckling with N-M interaction
k, buckling factor for outstand flanges
k W effective length factor for warping end condition
ky9 k z factors for N-M interaction
Kr roughness factor of the terrain
C portion of a member
fLT effective length for out-of-plane bending
L system length; span length; weld length
Lb buckling length of member
LTB lateral-torsional buckling
L distance between extreme fastener holes
m mass per unit length
max maximum
min minimum
M bending moment
Mb.Rd design resistance moment for lateral-torsional buckling
MC, elastic critical moment for lateral-torsional buckling
Mc.Rd design resistance moment of the cross-section
Me torsional moment
Mer elastic moment capacity
Mf.Rd design plastic resistance moment of the cross-section consisting of the flanges
only
MN.Rd reduced design plastic resistance moment allowing for axial force N
MN.V.Rd reduced design plastic resistance moment allowing for axial force N and by shear
force V
M N . V .y.Rd reduced design plastic resistance moment about yy axis allowing for axial force N
and shear force V
M N.V .z.Rd reduced design plastic resistance moment about zz axis allowing for axial force N
and shear force V
M N . y.Rd reduced design plastic resistance moment about yy axis allowing for axial force N
MN.zRd reduced design plastic resistance moment about zz axis axial force N
217
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix A :List of symbols
MPf plastic moment capacity

MpLRd design plastic resistance moment of the cross-section
MpLw.Rd design plastic resistance moment of the web
MpLy.Rd design plastic resistance moment of the cross-section about yy axis
MpLz.Rd design plastic resistance moment of the cross-section about zz axis
MRd design bending moment resistance of the member
MSd design bending moment applied to the member
MV.Rd design plastic resistance moment reduced by shear force
Mw.Sd design value of moment applied to the web
MY bending moment about yy axis
My.Sd design bending moment about yy axis applied to the member
MZ bending moment about zz axis
Mz.Sd design bending moment about zz axis applied to the member
n number of fastener holes on the block shear failure path
n, number of columns in plane
nr number of members to be restrained by the bracing system
nS number of storeys
N normal force; axial load
NnD National Application Document
NbRd design buckling resistance of the member
N b .y .Rd design buckling resistance of the member according to yy axis
Nb.z.Rd design buckling resistance of the member according to zz axis
Ncompression normal force in compression
Na elastic critical axial force
Nc.Rd design compression resistance of the cross-section
Nl
Sd design value of tensile force applied perpendicular to the fillet weld
NpLRd design plastic resistance of the gross cross-section
NRd design resistance for tension or compression member
NSd design value of tensile force or compressive force
Nt.Rd design tension resistance of the cross-section
Ntension normal force in tension
Nu.Rd design ultimate resistance of the net cross-section at holes for fasteners
Nx.Sd design internal axial force applied to member according to xx axis
P l y P2 distances between bolt holes
P Point load
9 imposed variable distributed load
qk characteristic value of imposed variable distributed load
qref reference mean wind pressure
Q imposed variable point load
Qd design variable action
Qk characteristic value of imposed variable point load
Qk.max variable action which causes the largest effect
r radius of root fillet
R rolled sections
Ra,Rd design crippling resistance of the web
Rb,Rd design buckling resistance of the web
Rd design resistance of the member subject to internal forces or moment
218
I Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix A :List of symbols
characteristic value of
design crushing resistance of the web
snow load
thickness of fillet weld
design snow load
characteristic value of the snow load on the ground
length of stiff bearing
effects of actions at ULS
design value of an internal force or moment applied to the member
characteristic value of effects of actions at ULS
Serviceability Limit states
design thickness, nominal thickness of element, material thickness
flange thickness
thickness of the plate under the bolt head or the nut
thickness of a plate welded to an unstiffened flange
web thickness
major axis
Ultimate Limit States
minor axis
reference wind velocity
basic value of the reference wind velocity
shear force; total vertical load
design shear buckling resistance
elastic critical value of the total vertical load
design value of shear force applied parallel to the fillet weld
design value of shear force applied perpendicular to the fillet weld
design shear plastic resistance of cross-section
design shear plastic resistance of cross-section according to yy axis (// to web)
design shear plastic resistance of cross-section according to zz axis (Ito flange)
design shear resistance of the member
design shear force applied to the member; design value of the total vertical load
shear forces applied parallel to yy axis
design shear force applied to the member parallel to yy axis
shear force parallel to zz axis
design internal shear forces applied to the member parallel to zz axis
wind pressure on a surface
design wind load
wind pressure on external surface
welded sections
elastic section modulus of effective class 4 cross-section
elastic section modulus of effective class 4 cross-section according to yy axis
elastic section modulus of effective class 4 cross-section according to zz axis
elastic section modulus of class 3 cross-section
elastic section modulus of class 3 cross-section according to yy axis
elastic section modulus of class 3 cross-section according to zz axis
plastic section modulus of class 1 or 2 cross-section
plastic section modulus of class 1 or 2 cross-section according to yy axis
219
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix A :List of symbols
Wprz plastic section modulus of class 1 or 2 cross-section according to zz axis

x, xx axis along the member
xk characteristic value of the material properties
Y, YY principal axis of cross section (parallel to flanges, in general)
2, zz principal axis of cross section (parallel to the web, in general)
Ze reference height for evaluation of Ce
2. Greek symbols
a coefficient of frequency of the basis mode vibration
a coefficient of linear thermal expansion
a factor to determine the position of the neutral axis
acr coefficient of critical amplification or coefficient of remoteness of critical state of
the frame
PA non-dimensional coefficient for buckling
PM equivalent uniform moment factor for flexural buckling
PMLT equivalent uniform moment factor for lateral-torsional buckling
PMY equivalent uniform moment factor for flexural buckling about yy axis
PMZ equivalent uniform moment factor for flexural buckling about zz axis
PW non-dimensional coefficient for lateral-torsional buckling
PW correlation factor (for a fillet weld)
YF partial safety factor for force or for action
YG partial safety factor for permanent action
YM partial safety factor for the resistance at ULS
%Ab partial safety factor for the resistance of bolted connections
YMsser partial safety factor for the slip resistance of preloaded bolts
YMW partial safety factor for the resistance of welded connections
YMO partial safety factor for resistance at ULS of class 1,2 or 3 cross-sections
(plasticity or yielding)
YM1 partial safety factor for resistance of class 4 cross-sections (local buckling
resistance)
partial safety factor for the resistance of member to buckling
partial safety factor for the resistance of net section at bolt holes
partial safety factor for variable action
relative horizontal displacement of top and bottom of a storey
horizontal displacement of the braced frame
design deflection
design vertical deflection of floors, beams, ...
design horizontal deflection of frames
recommended limit of horizontal deflection
in plane deflection of the bracing system due to q plus any external loads
deflection due to variable load (9)
horizontal displacement of the unbraced frame
design vertical deflection of floors, beams, ...
recommended limit of vertical deflection
pre-camber (hogging) of the beam in the unloaded state (state 0)
variation of the deflection of the beam due to permanent loads (G) immediatly
after loading (state 1)
220
I Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix A :List of symbols
62 variation of the deflection of the beam due to the variable loading (Q) (state 2)
A
&
displacement
coefficient = E (with fy in N/mm2)
rotation
slenderness of the member for the relevant buckling mode
Euler slenderness for buckling
non-dimensional slenderness ratio of the member for buckling
effective non-dimensional slenderness of the member for buckling about vv axis
effective non-dimensional slenderness of the member for buckling about yy axis
effective non-dimensional slenderness of the member for buckling about zz axis
non-dimensional slenderness ratio of the member for lateral-torsional buckling
plate slenderness ratio for class 4 effective cross-sections
non-dimensional slenderness of the member for buckling about vv axis
non dimensional slenderness ratio of the member for buckling about yy axis
non dimensional slenderness ratio of the member for buckling about zz axis
factor for F s . a depending on surface class
snow load shape coefficient
factor for N-M interaction with lateral-torsional buckling
factor for N-Minteraction
factor for N-M interaction
density
reduction factor due to shear force V S d
reduction factor due to shear force Vy.Sd
reduction factor due to shear force Vz.Sd
normal stress
numerical values for the stabilizing forces of a bracing system
design values of normal stresses for web check with Von Mises criteria
shear stresss
Poisson's ratio
initial sway imperfection of the frame
reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode
reduction factor for lateral-torsional buckling
minimum of xy and xz
reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode about yy axis
reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode about zz axis
22 1
[Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix B : List of tables 1
APPENDIX B List of tables
Page
0.c SYMBOLS AND NOTATIONS 17
Table 0.1 Dimensions and axes of rolled steel sections 18
I INTRODUCTION 21
Table 1.1 Summary of design requirements 26
Table 1.2 Partial safety factor y~ for the resistance 27
Table 1.3 Definition of framing for horizontal loads 38
Table 1.4 Checks at Serviceability Limit States 39
Table 1.5 Member submitted to internal forces, moments and transverse forces 40
Table 1.6 Planes within internal forces, moments (NSd, VSd, MSd) and transverses forces
FSd are acting 41
Table 1.7 Internal forces, moments and transverse forces to be checked at ULS for
different types of loading 42
Table 1.8 List of references to chapters of the design handbook related to all check
formulas at ULS 43
II STRUCTURAL CONCEFT OF THE BUILDING 45
Table 11.1 Typical types of joints 48
Table 11.2 Modelling of joints 49
Table 11.3 Comparison table of different steel grades designation 50
Table 11.4 Nominal values of yield strength fy and ultimate tensile strength f, for
structural steels to EN 10025 and EN 101 13 51
Table 11.5 Maximum thickness for statically loaded structural elements 52
Table 11.6 Maximum thickness for statically loaded structural elements 53
Table 11.7 Nominal values of yield strength fyb and ultimate tensile strength fub for bolts 53
Table 11.8 Material coefficient 54
m LOAD ARRANGEMENTS AND LOAD CASES 55
Table III.1 Load arrangements (Fk) for building design according to EC1 60
Table III.2 Imposed load (qk, Qk) on floors in buildings 61
Table III.3 Pressures on surfaces 62
Table III.4 Exposure coefficient ce as a function of height z above ground 63
Table III.5 Reference height Ze depending on h and b 63
Table III.6 External pressure cpefor buildings depending on the size of the effected area 64
Table III.7 Combinations of acnons for serviceability limit states 65
Table III.8 Combinations of actions for ultimate limit states 66
Table III.9 Examples for the application of the combinations rules in table III.8.
All actions (g, q, P, s, w) are considered to originate from different sources 66
Iv DESIGN OF BRACED OR NON-SWAY FRAME 67
Table IV. 1 Modelling of frame for analysis 70
Table IV.2 Modelling of connections 69
Table IV.3 Global imperfections of the frame 77
Table IV.4 Values for the initial sway imperfections $ 78
Table IV.5 Specific actions for braced or non-sway frames 79
Table IV.6 Recommended limits for horizontal deflections 80
V CLASSIFICATION OF CROSS-SECTIONS 81
Table V. 1 Definition of the classification of cross-section 87
Table V.2 Determinant dimensions of cross-sections for classification 93
Table V.3 Classification of cross-section : limiting width-to thickness ratios for class 1 &
class 2 I cross-sections submitted to different types of loading 94
223
1Ref. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix B :List of tables .
1
Table V.4 Classification of cross-section : limiting width-to thickness ratios for

class 3 I cross-sections submitted to different types of loading 95
Table V.5 Buckling factor for outstand flanges 96
Table V.6 Classification of cross-section : limiting width-to-thickness ratios for internal
flange elements submitted to different types of loading 97
Table V.7 Classification of cross-section : limiting width-to-thickness ratios for angles
tubular sections submitted to different types of loading 98
Table V.8 Effective cross-sectional data for symmetrical profiles (class 4 cross-sections) 99
Table V.9 Limiting values of axial load NSd for web classification of I cross-sections
subject to .axial load NSd and to bending according to major axis My.Sd 100
Table V. 10 Examples of shift of centroidal axis of effective cross-section 101
VI MEMBERS IN TENSION (Ntension) 103
Table VI.l List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in tension (Ntension) 108
Table VI.2 Gross and net cross-sections 109
Table VI.3 Reduction factors p2 and p3 110
Table VI.4 Connection of angles 111
VII MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION (Ncompresion) 113
Table VII.l List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in compression (Ncomp.) 117
Table V11.2 Imperfection factor a 120
Table VII.3 Value of Euler slenderness hl 120
Table VIIA Selection of buckling curve for a cross-section 121
Table VIIS Buckling length of column : Lb 122
Table VII.6 Reduction factors x = f (5 123
VIII MEMBERS IN BENDING (V ;M ;( V,M)) 127
Table VIII. 1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member in bending according to
the applied internal forces and/or moments(V ;M ;( V,M)) 131
Table VIII.2 Recommended limiting values for vertical deflections 135
Table VIII.3 Vertical deflections to be considered 135
Table VI11.4 Recommended limiting values for floor vibrations 136
Table VII1.5 Shear area A, for cross-sections 138
Table VIII.6 Determination of for block shear resistance 139
Table VI11.7 Limiting width-to-thickness ratio related to the shear buckling in web 139
Table VIII.8 Simple post-critical shear strength zba 140
Table VIII.9 Buckling factor for shear kT 140
Table VIII. 10 Reduction factor XLT = f&) for lateral-torsional buckling 144
Table VIII. 11 Effective length factors : k, k, 144
Table VIII. 12 Numerical values for C1 and definition of y~ 145
Table VIII. 13 Reduced design plastic resistance moment MV.Rd allowing for shear force 147
Table VIII. 14 Interaction of shear buckling resistance and moment resistance with the simple
post-critical method 149
M MEMBERS WITH COMBINED AXIAL FORCE AND
BENDING MOMENT ((N, M) ;(N, V, M)) 151
Table IX.1 List of checks to be performed at ULS for the member submitted to combined
axial force and bending moment (N, M) 154
Table IX.2 Principle of interaction formulas between axial force NSd and bending moment
MSd 160
Table IX.3 Reduced design plastic resistance moment MNxd allowing for axial load for
Class 1 or 2 cross-sections 161
Table IX.4 Interaction formulas for the (N,M) stability check of members of Class 1 or 2 165
Table IX.5 Interaction formulas for the (N,M) stability check of members of Class 3 166
224
I Ref. -
EC 3 for non-sway buildings Appendix B :List of tables 1
Table IX.6 General interaction formulas for the (N.M) stability check of members of Class 4 167
Table IX.7 Supplementary interaction formulas for the (N,M)-stability check of members
of Class 4 168
Table IX.8 Reduced design resistance NVXd allowing for shear force 169
Table IX.9 Reduced design plastic resistance moment MN.V&d allowing for axial load and
shear force for Class 1 or 2 cross-sections 172
X TRANSVERSE FORCES ON WEBS (F ;(F,N,V,M)) 177
Table X. 1 Failure modes due to load introduction 179
Table X.2 Stresses in web panel due to bending moment, axial force and transverse force 180
Table X.3 Yield criteria to be satisfied by the web 181
Table X.4 Load introduction 182
Table X.5 Length of stiff bearing, ss 182
Table X.6 Interaction formula of crippling resistance and moment resistance 183
Table X.7 Effective breadth beff for web buckling resistance 184
Table X.8 Compression flange buckling in plane of the web 185
Table X.9 Maximum width-to-thickness ratio at, 185
XI CONNECTIONS 187
Table XI. 1 Designation of distances between bolts 190
Table XI.2 Linear distribution of loads between fasteners 190
Table XI.3 Possible plastic distribution of loads between fasteners. Any realistic
combination could be used, e.g. 191
Table XI.4 Prying forces 191
Table XI.5 Categories of bolted connections 192
Table XI.6 Bearing resistance per bolt for recommended detailing for t = 10 mm in [kr\rl 193
Table XI.7 Shear resistance per bolt and shear plane in [w 194
Table XI.8 Long joints 194
Table XI.9 Tension resistance per bolt in [kNJ 195
Table XI. 10 Interaction formula of shear resistance and tension resistance of bolts 195
Table XI. 11 Characteristic slip resistance per bolt and friction interface for 8.8 and 10.9
bolts, where the holes in all the plies have standard nominal clearances 196
Table XI. 12 Common types of welded joints 197
Table XI. 13 Throat thickness 198
Table XI. 14 Action effects in fillet welds 198
Table XI. 15 Resistance of a fillet weld 199
Table XI. 16 Effective breadth of an unstiffened tee joint 200
XII DESIGN OF BRACING SYSTEM 201
Table XII. 1 Load arrangements of the bracing system 209
Table X11.2 Bracing system imperfections 21 1
Table X11.3 Values for the equivalent stabilizing force Zq 21 1
Table X11.4 Bracing system imperfections (examples) 212
APPENDIX D 227
Table D.1 List of references to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 related to all check formulas at ULS 227
225
IRef. EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix C : List of flow-charts
APPENDIX C List of flow-charts
Chapter Pages
I - Elastic global analysis of steel frames according to Eurocode 3
General I 28
Details I 29
Comments (6 pages) I 31 to36
LII. 1 - Load arrangements & load cases for general global analysis of the structure 111 58
III.2 - Load arrangements & load cases for first order elastic global analysis of I11 59
the structure
IV - Elastic global analysis of braced or non-sway steel frames according to EC 3
General IV 72
Details IV 73
Comments (4 pages) IV 74 to 75
V.l - Classification of I cross-section V 84
V.2 - Calculation of effective cross-section properties of Class 4 cross-section IV 85
VI.l - Members in tension (Ntension) VI 106
VI.2 - Angles connected by one leg and submitted to tension VI 107
VII - Members in compression (Ncompression) VI1 116
VIII - Design of I members in uniaxial bending (VZ;My;(VZ,My))or(Vy
;MZ;(Vy,Mz)) VIII 130
XII - Elastic global analysis of bracing system according to Eurocode 3
General XI1 !04
Details XI1 !05
Comments (6 pages) XI1 !06 to 208
EC 3 for non-sway buildings - Appendix D
rable D.l List of references to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 related to all check fomulas at ULS
iternal forces Type , References to Eurocode 3 Part 1.1 for ULS checks
ioments, and of in function of classes of cross-sections([5.3]) : Physical phenomena
amverse forces checks classes 1 or 2 I class 3 class 4
. Ntension R I5.4.3 (1)1+ [5.4.2.21+ r6.5.2.31 + L6.6.101 tension resistance (gross & net section)
. Ncompression . R [5.4.4 (1),(2)1 [5.4.4 (1),(2)] compression resistance
S r5.5.1.1 (1). (3)l 55.1.1 (1),(3)] N buckling of members
. v R [5.4.6 (1)1 + 16.5.2.21 shear and block shear resistances
S :5.6.1 (l)] + [5.6.3] shear buckling
. M R [5.4.5.1 (111 [5.4.5.1 (2)] [5.4.5.1 (l)] uniaxial bending resistance
S [5.5.2 (111 6.5.2 (1)l f5.5.2 (1)l lateral-torsional buckling (Mv) (LTB)
biaxial bending resistance
biaxial flexural buckling

~
15.4.7 (3)i uniaxial bending & shear resistance
7
S 5 6 . 7 2 (1),(2),(3)1 uniaxial bending & shear buckling

R [5.4.7 (3)] + formulas for (My, M a biaxial bending & shear resistance
S formulas for (Vz, My) uniaxial bending & shear buckling
I -
R [5.4.8.11 I 15.4.8.2 (2)1 I r5.4.8.3 (2)l uniaxial bending & axial force resistance
(N,VZ?M,&> s formulas for (N,V,My) interaction (N-uniaxial M) resistance & shear bucklin
3. F,(FN,(FMy), R [5.4.10 (211 [5.4.10 (l)] [5.4.10 (l)] transverse force (+N, +My) resistance
(FNM”)
F R r5.7.3 (1)1 crushing
F S l5.7.4 (111 + [5.7.5 (1),(2),(3)1 crippling + buckling
(FNy) S [5.7.4 (2)3 + formulas for M crippling
S [5.7.7 (1),(2)] [5.7.7 (1),(2)] [5.7.7 (1),(2)] compression flange induced buckling
4. oF,VZ),(FNN,VZ), transverse forces + shear Vz (+N, +My)
[5.4.10 (5)] [5.4.10 (4)] [5.4.10 (4)]
(F,VzMy), resistance
(F7”,z9My) s formulas for (N,V,M,) interaction (N-uniaxialM) resistance & shear bucklin
ype of loading: 1. = tension members
2. = compression members
3. to 7. = members in bending
8. to 12. = members with combined N-M
13. to 14. = transverse forces on webs
ype of checks: R = resistance of cross-sections ([5.4])
S = stability of members (15.51) or webs ([5.61,[5.71)
227
STRUCTURAL STEEL RESEARCH REPORTS
established by
RPS DEPARTEMENT / ProfilARBED RECHERCHES
Gdrardy J.C. ,Schleich J.B.; Elasto Plastic Behaviour of Steel Frames with Semi-Rigid Connections / NORDIC STEEL
COLLOQUIUM on Research and Development within The Field of steel Construction; Odense, Denmark, 9-11 September
1991, RPS Report No101/91.
Gdrardy J.C. ,Schleich J.B.;Semi-Rigid Action in Steel Frames Structures / CEC agreement N"7210-SA / 507 ;Final Report
EUR 14427 EN, Luxembourg 1992, RPS Report N"10391.
Pdpin R.,Schleich J.B.; Seismic Resistance of Composite Structures, SRCS / CEC agreement N"7210-SA / 506 ; Final
Report EUR 14428.EN, Luxembourg 1992, RPS Report N0103/91.
Chantrain Ph.,Schleich J.B.; Interaction Diagrams between Axial Load N and Bending Moment M for Columns submitted
to Buckling / CEC agreement N"7210-SA / 510 ;Final Report EUR 14546EN, November 1991, RPS Report N"104/91.
Schaumann P., Steffen A.; Verbundbriicken auf Basis von Walztriigern, Versuch Nr. 1 Einstegiger Verbundtrager / HRA,
Bochum, Juli 1990, HRA Bericht A 89199, RPS Report N"105/90.
Schaumann P., Steffen A.; Verbundbriicken auf Basis von Walztrigern, Versuch Nr. 2 Realistischer Verbundbrtickentrager
/ HRA, Bochum, November 1991, HRA Bericht A 89199-2, RPS Report No 106/91.
Bruls A., Wang J.P. ; Composite Bridges with Hot Rolled Beams in High Strength Steel Fe E 460,and Spans up to 50 m /
Service Ponts et Charpentes, Universitb de LiBge; Likge, November 1991,RF'S Report N"l07/91.
Schleich J.B., Witry A.; Acier HLE pour Ponts Mixtes B Portks Moyennes de 20 B 50 m / Journ& Siddnugique ATS 1991;
Paris, 4 et 5 dbcembre 1991, RPS Report N0108/91.
Schaumann P, Steffen A.; Verbundbriicken auf Basis von Walztriigern, Versuch Nr. 5 Haupttragerstoss mit
Stahlbetonauflagerquertrager/ HRA, Bochum, Januar 1992, HRA Bericht A 90232-A, RPS Report N"109/92.
Schaumann P, Schleich J.B., Kulka H., Tilmanns H.; Verbundbriicken unter Verwendung von Walztriigern /
Zusammenstellung der Vortrage anlkslich des Seminars "Verbundbriickentag"am 12.09.90 an der Ruhruniversitit Bochum,
RPS Report NO1 10/92.
Schaumann P., Steffen A.; Verbundbriicken auf Basis von Walztriigern, Versuche Nr. 3 U. 4 Haupttragerstoss mit
geschraubten Steglaschen / HRA, Bochum 1992, HRA Bericht !30232-B, RPS Report N"111/92.
Schleich J.B., Witry A.; Neues Konzept fiir einfache Verbundbriicken mit Spannweiten von 20 bis 50 m / E.Leipziger
Metallbau-Kolloquium;Leipzig, 27. M& 1992, RPS Report NO1 12/92.
Bergmann R., Kindmann R.; Auswertung der Versuche zum Tragverhalten von Verbundprofilen mit ausbetonierten
Kammern; Verbundstiitzen / Ruhruniversitat Bochum, Bericht N"9201, Februarl992, RPS Report N"1 13/92.
Bergmann R., Kindmann R.; Auswertung der Versuche zum Tragverhalten von Verbundprofilen mit ausbetonierten
Kammern; Verbundtriiger / Ruhruniversitat Bochum. Bericht N"9202, M& 1992, RPS Report N"114/92.
Mang F., Schleich J.B., Wippel H., Witry A.; Untersuchungen an stegparallel versteiften Rahmenknoten, ausgefuhrt aus
dickflanschigen hochfesten Walzprofden .Entwurf hochbelasteter Vierendeeltrager im Rahmen des Neubaus des Zentrums
fiir Kunst und Medientechnologie ( ZKM ), Karlauhe / RPS Report NO1 15/92.
Chantrain Ph.. Becker A., Schleich J.B.; Behaviour of HISTAR hot-rolled profiles in the steel construction - Tests / RPS
Report N0116/91.
Bode H., Kunzel R.; Composite Beams of Fe E 460 Quality, Research report 2/90; University of Kaiserslautem, Mach 1990;
RPS Report N"1 17/92.
Bruls A., Wang J.P. ; Composite Bridges with Hot Rolled Beams in High Strength Steel Fe E 460, Fe E 600 up to 60 meters
/ Service Ponts et Charpentes, Universitb de Lihge; Lihge, August 1992, RPS Report N"1 18/92.
Gdrardy J.C., Schleich J.B. ; Elasto-Plastic Behaviour of Steel Frame Works / CEC agreement No7210-SA/508 ;Final Report
EUR 15627 EN, Luxembourg 1992, RPS Report No 119/92.
Chantrain Ph., Schleich J.B.; Simplified version of Eurocode 3 for usual buildings / CEC agreement N"7210-SA/513 and No
PHIN-94-0021, ECCS Publication No 85;Final Report EUR 16 839 EN, Apnll994, RPS Report 120/96.
Chantrain Ph., Schleich J.B.; Simplified version of Eurocode 4 for usual buildings / CEC agreement No7210-SA/516 ; Final
Report, April 1996. RPS Report 121/96.
Chantrain Ph., Schleich J.B.; Improved classification of steel and composite cross-sections : New rules for local buckling in
Eurocodes 3 and 4 / CEC agreement N07210-SA/519/319/934 ;Final Report, April 1996, RPS Report 122/96.
Chantrain Ph., Schleich J.B.; Promotion of plastic design for steel and composite cross-sections : new required conditions in
Eurocodes 3 and 4, practical tools for designers (Rotation capacities of profiles ...) / CEC agreement "'7210-
SA/520/321/935 ;Final Report, April 1996, RPS Report 123/96.
Chantrain Ph., Schleich J.B.; Ductility of plastic hinges in steel structures - Guide for plastic analysis ;Fifth draft, February
1996, RPS Report 124/96.

Design Handbook For Braced or Non Sway S

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Handbook For Braced or Non Sway S

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EUROPEAN CONVENTION FOR CONSTRUCTIONAL STEELWORK

CECM CONVENTION EUROPEENNE DE LA CONSTRUCTION METALLIQUE

ECCS General Secretariat

CHANTRAIN Ph. ,Project Manager

Service Recherches et Promotion technique Structures

Name I Company I Language

Ing. Y. GalCa * C.T.I.C.M. French

II STRUCTURAL CONCEPT OF THE BUILDING 45

M MEMBERS WIT" COMBINED AXIAL FORCE AND

IX.e Verifications at ULS for (NSd ,VSd) 169

X TRANSVERSE FORCES ON WEBS (F ;(F, N, V, M)) 177

XI.c.3 Design resistance of fillet weld 198

APPENDIX A List of symbols 215

0.a.4 How to read this design handbook

Main text with a following example about layout of chapters:

(1) Particular thanks for fruitful collaboration are addressed to:

Ref. 6 "Design handbook for sway buildings", from Sidercad (Italy)

Ref. 9 Paper "Application de 1'Eurocode 3 : classement des sections transversales en I",

0.c Symbols and notations

O.c.2 Convention for member axes

O.c.3 Dimensions and axes of rolled steel sections

O.c.4 Notations in flow-charts

- the references to Eurocode 3 are given in [...I

- convention for flow-charts:

other flow-chart number (y)

the dotted line (-----) means that path

Table 0.1 Dimensions and axes of rolled steel sections

0.d Definitions and units

1.a Basis of design

where Fk is the characteristic (unfactored) value of action.

I.a.3 Design requirements

I.a.3.2 Serviceability Limit States

where Sd is the design value of an internal force or moment (or of a respective

Table 1.1 Summary of design requirements

where F k is the characteristic value of actions

3) verification conditions at limit states:

where Rk is the characteristic value of the used material

condition concerning separate internal forces or moments or,

Table 1.2 Partial safety factor for the resistance

The design values of - the resistances of cross-sections

- resistance of class 4 cross-section*):

- resistance of members to buckling

- resistance of net section at bolt holes

- resistance of bolted connections

- resistance of welded connections

- at Serviceability Limit States:

* The classification of cross-sections is defined in chapter V.

Flow-chart I : Elastic global analysis of steel frames according to Eurocode 3 (General)

Choice of the type of global analysis

ULS global analysis of the frame

to determine the internal forces and moments (N, V, M)

ULS checks of members 16

submitted to internal forces and moments (N, V, M)

ULS checks of local effects 20

ULS checks of connections 21

Frame with bracing system Frame without bracing system

I no > 0,5 [A.fy / N S d ] 0 7 5 b

Sway mode buckling

length approach length approach

I Classification of cross-section [Chap. 5.31 I I 16

c Checks of local effects (buckling

r Checks of connections [Chap. 6 and Annex Jl 21

I.b General flow-charts about elastic global analysis